COURSE OUTLINE

 Particulate nature of matter

 Atomic structure
 Colligative properties
 Bonding and structure
 Phase equilibrium
 Thermochemistry
 Physical equilibrium
 Chemical kinetics
 Chemical equilibrium
 Ionic equilibrium
 Electrochemistry
 Electrochemical cells

PARTICULATE NATURE OF MATTER

Matter is composed of tiny particles and it exists in three forms i.e. Solid, Liquid and Gas.
Kinetic theory is concerned in the way in which these particles move and are distributed out
hence the three states of matter.
The theory assumes that these particles have energy at all temperatures above zero Kelvin and
this energy is in form of Kinetic energy. Increase in temperature increases the Kinetic Energy.

i. SOLIDS
 Here particles are extremely closed together and this gives the solids compact nature,
high density and is compressible.
 Have stationary particles
 Have a definite shape and volume.
 On heating the solids, the particles gain energy and vibrate about the mean of fixed
positions. Application of sufficient heat, they expand; eventually their movement is so
much that they can‟t be held together by the forces of attraction, so the particles break
and melt to form liquid.

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 ii. LIQUIDS
 Particles have more Kinetic energy than in the solid state.
 These particles are far apart and free to move throughout the entire system. At this point,
the energy over comes the forces of attraction which makes the particles move in
continuous random motion at a greater speed.
 Liquids take up the shape of the container and also have a definite volume.
 Are incompressible.

iii. GASES
 Take up the shapes of their container and occupy the entire volume of the container
 The particles are independent on one another and the attraction forces are negligible

EVIDENCE OF EXISTANCE OF MATTER

a) Brownian motion;
This provides a strong evidence for the presence of moving particles, i.e. in the liquids
and gases.
i. In gases the movement of particles making up matter can be studied by the smoke cell
experiment.
In this experiment the smoke cell is illuminated by a beam of light and the smoke
particles are seen to move in all directions in a random manner colliding with each other.

This is evident that the smoke particles collide with the invincible air particles hence
random motion
Illustration

Microscope

Glass rod Cover slip

small light bulb

Smoke cell

ii. In liquids suspended pollen grains were observed to be moving in a random motion in a
liquid over small distances.

The motion of the suspended pollen grains was caused by water molecules which
bombarded them from all sides.
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 This provides evidence that water molecules are in constant motion

Since the particles are small, few bombardments occur because particles move from one
side to another resulting into a random motion.

b) Diffusion;
This is the uniform spreading of molecules from a region of high pressure to one of low
pressure.
In gases and liquids, diffusion can be explained by the idea that liquids and gases have
tiny particles. Particles in liquids are able to diffuse but less slowly than those in gases
because they have less Kinetic energy.
Diffusion in gases can be investigated by inserting a glass jar full of hydrogen gas over
the other full of Bromine gas. After a few seconds, the reddish brown bromine gas
spreads throughout the upper gas jar showing that the bromine particles have diffused
into the upper jar.

ILLUSTRATION

Hydrogen gas Gas jar

Gas plate

Bromine gas

GRAHAM’S LAW OF DIFFUSION

States that „at constant temperature and pressure, the rate of diffusion of a gas is inversely
proportion to the square root of its density‟ i.e.

Rate of diffusion α 1
Density of gas
Consider two gases A and B with rates of diffusion RA and RB respectively and densities ρA and
ρB respectively

RA α 1

ρA

RA = K ………………………….( i)

ρA

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 RB α 1

ρB

RB = K ………………………(ii)

ρB

Dividing ( i) by (ii)

RA = K ÷ K

RB ρA ρB

RA = K ρB

RB ρA K

RA ρB
= _________________________ (*)
RB ρA

But also density = mass

Volume
If volume is constant, then density is directly proportional to the mass.

Equation (i), becomes

1
RA α MA

K
RA =
MA

1
RB ∝ M
B

K
RB = M
B

RA K MB
= ×
RB MA K

RA MB
= _________________________ (**)
RB MA

Where MA = Relative molecular mass of A

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 MB = Relative molecular mass of B

Graham‟s law can also therefore be stated as “the rate of diffusion of gas at the same
conditions of temperature and pressure is inversely proportional to the square root of their
relative molecular mass”
1
Also rate =
time

𝟏
RA =
𝐭𝐀

𝟏
RA = Where tA and tB = time taken for gas A and B respectively to diffuse.
𝐭𝐁

Substituting for RA and RB in (*)

RA ρB
=
RB ρA

1
tA ρB
1 =
tB
ρA

tB ρB
=
tA ρA

Also (**) will be;

tB MB
=
tA MA

Examples

1.(a)State Graham‟s law

(bA certain volume of oxygen diffused through a porous membrane in 120s. Under the same
condition, the same volume of gas x diffuses in 112s.
Calculate the relative molecular mass of x(UNEB 2004)

Solution

tO2 =120s, tx =112s

MO2 = (16 × 2) = 32

Let the volume of the gases be 1cm3

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 1
RO2 = cm3 s−1
120

1
Also Rx = 112 cm3 s −1

Rate of diffusion O 2 MX
From Graham‟s law of diffusion; Rate =
of diffusion of X MO 2

1
120 MX
1 =
112
32

2
112 2 MX
=
120 32

112 2
× 32 = MX
120 2
MX = 27.875556
≈ 28
∴ The relative molecular mass of gas X is = 28.
2. Nitrogen gas diffuses 1.25times faster than gases X. calculate the relative molecular mass
of gas X.
Soln
Let the rate of diffusion of gas X be y
Rate of diffusion of nitrogen = 1.25y
Relative molecular mass of N2 = 14 × 2
= 28
From graham‟s law of diffusion;
Rate of diffusion of nitrogen = MX
Rate of diffusion of gas X MN2

1.25y MX
=
y 28
2
2 Mx
(1.25) = 28
2
MX = 1.25 × 28
= 43.75
≈ 44
∴ Relative molecular mass of gas X = 44

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
3. 6.3Cm3 of gas P diffuses through a porous partition in 5s. 7.4cm3 of oxygen diffuses
through the same partition in the same times. Calculate the molecular mass of P.

Soln
From Graham‟s Law of diffusion;

Volume 6.3
Rate of diffusion of p = = cm3 s −1
time 5
7.4 3 −1
Rate of diffusion of O2 = cm s
5

Rate of diffusion of gas P MO2

=
Rate of diffusion of O2 MP

6.3
5 32
7.4 = Mp
5

2 2
6.3 5 32
5
× =
7.4 Mp

31.5 32
=
37 Mp

𝐌𝐩 = 𝟒𝟒

4. The rate of diffusion of gas A: B is in a ratio of 2:1. If the RMM of A is 16, calculate the
RMM of B.

Solution

RA = 2, RMM of A = 16,
RB = 1, RMM B = ?
From Graham‟s law of diffusion
Rate of diffusion of A MB
=
Rate of diffusion of B MA
2
2
2 MB
=
1 MA
MB
4= 16
MB = 64
∴ The Relative molecular mass of B is 64.

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
5. Two pieces of cotton wool one soaked in concentrated amine Q and the other in
concentrated Hydrochloric acid, were placed at opposite ends of a 2m long glass tube.
After some time a white ring was formed at 0.96m from the end containing conc. HCl.
Determine the relative molecular mass of amine Q. (H = 1, Cl =35.5)

Soln:

2m Cotton wool soaked in HCl

1.04m 0.96m

Soaked in amine Q white ring (ammonium chloride)

If time of diffusion of HCl and Q = x s

0.96
Rate of diffusion of HCl = ms−1
x
1.04
Rate of diffusion of amine Q = ms −1
x
R Hcl MQ
From Graham‟s law of diffusion; =
RQ M HCl

But MHCl = 1 + 35.5 = 36.5

0.96
x MQ
1.04 = 36.5
x

0.962 M Q
= 36.5
1.04 2
𝐌𝐐 ≈ 𝟑𝟏
The Relative Molecular Mass of amine Q is 31
Trial questions

1. A given volume of gas Z diffuses through a hole in 14.1s while the same volume of CO2
diffuses through the same hole in 10s, calculate the RMM of gas Z(C=12, O=16)
2. Oxygen diffuses 1.19 times faster than amine P; determine the RMM of amine P.
Solution:
Let the volume of gas Z and CO2 be 1cm3
t z = 14.1s MCO 2 = 12 + (16× 2) = 44, MZ = ?
t CO 2 = 10s
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 From Graham‟s law of diffusion;
Rate of diffusion of CO 2 MZ
=
Rate of diffusion of gas Z M CO 2
1
MZ
⟹ 10 1 = 44
14.1

2
14.1 2 MZ
=
10 M CO 2
14.12 MZ
=
10 2 44
14.12
MZ = 10 2 × 44

= 87.4764
≈ 87.5
The Relative molecular mass of gas z is 87.5
2. Let the rate of diffusion of amine P = X
⟹ The rate of diffusion of Oxygen = 1.19x
MO2 = 16× 2 = 32
MP = ?
From Graham′ s law of diffusion;
Rate of diffusion of gas P MO 2
=
Rate of diffusion of Oxygen Mp

x 32
⟹ 1.19x = Mp
2
1 2 32
=
1.19 Mp

MP = 1.192 × 32 = 45.3152
≈ 45
∴ The relative molecular mass of gas P is 45

HOMEWORK

1. The rate of diffusion of a volatile fluoride containing 32.29% fluorine is 13.72 times as
slow as that of hydrogen. Establish the formula of this fluoride and the RAM of the
metal.
2. A gas X diffuses 4times as rapidly as Sulphur dioxide under the same condition. If the
density of Sulphur dioxide at the given temperature and pressure is 2.88×103g/m3, what is
the density of X.
3. Oxygen diffuses 0.9times faster than a hydrocarbon Q, calculate the relative molecular
mass of Q.
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 4. The time taken for 0.06cm3 of oxygen to diffuse through a porous partition is 10s.
Another gas Z at the same conditions of temperature and pressure diffuses through the
partition at the rate of 0.1cm3 in 20s. Determine the RMM of gas Z

FACTORS AFFECTING DIFFUSION

i. Density:
Lighter gases diffuse faster than the heavier ones.
ii. Temperature:
The rate of diffusion increases with the increase in temperature because the Kinetic energy of
the particles also increases due to the increasing temperatures.

APPLICATIONS OF DIFFUSION

1. Air bags
In a car collision, drivers suffer injury or death by being thrown forward onto the dash
board.
Now are fitted with air bags in the steering wheel that is inflated between the driver and
dash board on impact.
After the driver hits the bag, the gas diffuses out through the small holes in the bag in
order for the bag to deflate / reduce in size for the driver to live.
2. Separation of uranium.
During the separation of uranium 238, natural uranium consists of both uranium 235 and
uranium 238.
In order to separate U238 from U235, the metal is first converted into UF6 (hexaflourouranium)
The vapor of UF6 is then allowed to diffuse across porous nickel sheets.
The vapor is then reconverted to the metal and is found to contain mostly of a lighter
uranium 235 than uranium 238.
3. Use of perfumes, tear gas and pesticides.
When perfumes are sprayed/teargas is released into an area, their molecules are under high
pressure.
The high pressures causes them to move thereby diffusing to different regions of lower
pressure and hence are able to be smelt / sensed in different places by people and other
things.
4. Extraction of Helium from natural gas.
Helium may be found in a mixture of hydrocarbons or generally natural gas. In separating the
two, the mixture of helium and natural gas is allowed to pass across a very thin sheet of
Pyrex glass. Helium being lighter than the other hydrocarbon present in the natural gas will
diffuse faster and hence is separated / extracted.

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 NOTE: Effusion is the escape of a gas through a small hole. Graham’s law also applies to
effusion hence the rate of effusion of a gas is inversely proportional to the square root of its
density.

FACTORS AFFECTING EFFUSION

 Density of a gas
 Temperature of the surrounding
 Size of the hole

KINETIC THEORY OF GASES

The theory is mainly useful in accounting for the known properties of gases but it also clarifies
many problems concerned with liquids and solids.

Properties of gases:

 Are compressible: This is because the inter-molecular forces of attraction between the
molecules of gases are negligible.
 Diffuse faster because they are lighter than liquids and solids.
 Have low densities / molecular masses
 They expand on heating due to the weakening /breaking of the weak intermolecular
forces of attraction.
 Shows a large change in volume with change in pressure
 They are transparent and the degree of transparency depends on density.

ASSUMPTION OF KINETIC THEORY OF GASES:

 Gases consist of small particles called molecules.

 Molecules are in a state of rapid random motion colliding with one another and with the
walls of the container hence constituting pressure.
 The collisions of the molecules are perfectly elastic i.e. there is no loss of Kinetic energy.
In perfectly elastic collision, loss of Kinetic Energy by one molecule is balanced by an
equal gain by another.
 The average kinetic energy of the molecules is directly proportional to the average Kelvin
temperature.

GAS LAWS FOR IDEAL GAS.

Boyle’s law:
States that “at constant temperature, the pressure of a fixed mass of gas is inversely
proportional to its volume” i.e.

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 1
Pα
V
K
P=V
PV = K (constant)
If the pressure of a gas is increased from P1 to P2 then the volume decrease from V1 to V2
P1 V1 = P2 V2

 A plot of pressure of a gas against its volume

P×105 (Pa)

V (cm3)

 A plot of pressure of a gas against reciprocal of volume of gas

P × 105 (Pa)

1/V (m-3)

Charles’ law:
 It states that “at constant pressure, the volume of a fixed mass of gas is directly
proportional to its temperature” i.e. V α T; V= KT
V/ T = K (constant)
If the temperature of a gas is increased from T1 to T2 the volume also increases from V1
to V2.
V1 V2
=
T1 T2

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
  A plot of Volume of a gas against Temperature

Volume/m3

-273 -200 -100 0 100 200 273 Temp / K

Pressure law / Gay Lussac’s Law;

 States that “pressure of a fixed mass of gas is directly proportional to the absolute
temperature at constant volume” i.e. P α T P = KT
P
= K (constant)
T
If the temperature of the gas is increased from T1 to T2 at constant volume, the pressure
increases from P1 to P2
𝐏𝟏 𝐏𝟐
=
𝐓𝟏 𝐓𝟐

Boyles‟ Law and Charles‟ law can be combined to give a single equation representing
the relation between pressure, volume and Kelvin of a given mass of a gas under
different conditions.
If a given mass of gas has a volume, V1 at a pressure,P1 ; it will have a volume ,Vx at a
pressure, P2 at constant temperature.
⟹ From Boyle‟s law;
P1V1 = P2Vx _________________________ (i)
Changing the temperature at which Vx is measured from T1 to T2, the new volume of a
gas V2 will be given by Charles‟ law as
Vx V
= T 2 _____________________________ (ii)
T1 2
Making Vx the subject (ii) and substituting in (i) will obtain.
V 2 T1
Vx = _______________________ (*)
T2
Substituting * into (i)
V 2 T1
⟹ P1 V1 = P2 T2
P2 V 2 T1
P1 V1 = T2
𝐏𝟏 𝐕𝟏 𝐏𝟐 𝐕𝟐
∴ =
𝐓𝟏 𝐓𝟐
𝐏𝐕
Generally = K (Constant) ______________________________ (iii)
𝐓

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
From (iii) PV = constant× T
Constant = R
PV = RT for 1 mole.
PV = nRT for n moles.
The constant is the molar gas constant, R
For 1 mole of a gas PV = RT
For n moles of a gas; PV = nRT: ideal gas equation

CALCULATION OF THE VALUE OF MOLAR GAS CONSTANT(R)

Value of R depends on the units adopted for the quantities in the ideal gas equation i.e for 1 mole
of a gas at S.T.P, P=101325Nm-2 ,T = 273K and V(22.4/1000 = 0.0224m 3) R =? n =1

From, PV = nRT
(101325 ×0.0224 )
R = PV/nT =
(1×273)

R = 8.314J mole-1 K−1

But if pressure is in atmospheres,

P = 1 atmospheric pressure

T= 273K
(1×22.4)
V= 22.4dm-3; R =PV/nT =
(1×273)

= 0.082051282

R = 0.08205 atmosphere dm3mol-1K-1

Examples.

1. A certain mass of a gas has a volume of 241m3 at 180C and 100400Pa. what would be its
volume at s.t.p.
Solution;
P1V1 P2V2
From =
T1 T2
P1 V1 T2 100400 ×241 ×273
V2 = = = 224.03 ≈ 224 m3
P2 T1 291 ×101325

2. A closed bulb contains a certain volume of a gas at 210C and 100700Pa. find :

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 i. the pressure of the gas if the temperature is raised to 510C
ii. The temperature to which the bulb must be heated to double the pressure.

Solution:

(i) Using Pressure Law;

P1 P2
=
T1 T2

P1 T2 100700 ×324
P2 = = = 110975.5Pa
T1 294

ii) Using Pressure Law;

P1 P2
=
T1 T2

P2 T1 (2×P1×294
T2 = = = 588K
P1 (P1)

Questions

1) 2.20g of carbon dioxide occupies 1166cm3at 150Cand 12700Pa pressure. calculate the
value of the gas constant, R in j mol-1K-1
2) A sealed flask contains oxygen at 170 C and 99300Pa pressure. what would be the
pressure of oxygen if the temperature was lowered to −230 C?

DENSITY AND MOLAR MASS OF A GAS

The density of a gas is found by weighing unknown volume of a gas. From PV = nRT, but
mass of gas (m)
number of moles (n) = molar mass of agas (M)

n = m/M
PV =m/MRT
PVM =mRT
mRT
PM = ……………………………1
V
Recall: density of a gas (ρ) = mass of gas /volume of gas = m/v
PM = ρRT
M=ρRT/P

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
Example :

1. At 273K and 1.01 × 105Nm-2, 6.319g of a gas X occupy 2dm3. Determine the molar mass of
gas X (R = 8.314Jmol-1K-1)
Soln

T = 273K, P = 1.01 × 105Nm-2 , m = 6.319g, V=2dm3=2 × 10-3m3

From PV=m/MRT
M = mRT/PV
M = 71g

2. Calculate the molar mass of a gas with a density of 2.615gdm-3 at 298K and 101Nm-2 (R =
8.314Jmol-1K-1)

Solution
m
PV = RT
M

mRT 2.615 ×8.314 ×298

M= = = 64.15 ≈ 64.2g
pv 101×0.001

3. An ideal gas occupies 225cm3 at 280K and 4.8×105Nm-2 pressure.

Determine the number of moles of gas present (R = 8.314Jmol-1)

DALTON’S LAW OF PARTIAL PRESSURE

Partial pressure of a gas is the pressure which that gas exerts if it occupies a vessel alone which
was initially occupied by a mixture of gases.

Dalton‟s law states that “the total pressure of a mixture of gases is equal to the sum of their
partial pressures”.

Consider gases A and B placed in a vessel having partial pressures PA and PB respectively.
According to Dalton‟s law of partial pressure;

Total pressure (PT) = Partial pressure of A + Partial pressure of B

PT = PA + PB _______________ (i)

If gases A and B have their number of moles as nA and nB respectively,

Total number of moles, nT = nA + nB

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
Mole fraction of a gas

Is the ratio of the number of moles of a component of a gas to the total number of moles of the
components of the gases in the mixture.

Mole fraction is denoted by X

nA nA
For gas A, XA = nA + nB = nT

nB nB
For gas B, XB = nA + nB = nT

Also applying the ideal gas equation; PV = nRT.

From (i) PTV = nTRT. ____________________ ∗

For gas A: PAV = nART._____________________**

For gas B; PBV = nBRT.______________________***

Dividing ** and *** by *

PA V
= nn TRT
A RT
PT V

nA
PA= nT PT _____________________________________ (1)

PB V
= nnTRT
B RT
PT V

nB
PB= nT PT _____________________________________ (2)

From (1) and (2), partial pressure is therefore the product of the mole fraction of the gas and the
total pressure of the gases in the mixture.

Also from PT = PA + PB
nA nB
PT = PT + PT
nT nT

PT = XA PT + XB PT, PT =(XA +XB) PT

⇒ XA + XB = 1

From the expression above, the sum of all mole fractions is equal to 1 .

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
Examples

1. 12g of Nitrogen, 0.4g of Hydrogen and 9g of Oxygen are put in a 1 litre vessel at a
pressure of 22.4 atmospheres. Calculate the partial pressures of the respective gases (N =
14, H = 1, O = 16)
Soln:
Relative molecular mass of H2 = 1× 2 = 2
O2 = 16×2 = 32
N2 = 14 × 2 = 28
0.4
Number of moles of H2 = 2
= 0.2 moles
12
Number of moles of N2 = 28 = 0.43 moles
9
Number of moles of O2 = 32 = 0.28 moles
Total number of moles = 0.2 + 0.43 + 0.28
= 0.91 moles
But total pressure = 22.4 atmospheres
Partial pressure of gas = Mole fraction of gas × Total pressure
0.28
Partial pressure of O2 = 0.91 × 22.4 = 6.89 atmospheres
0.43
Partial pressure of N = 0.91 × 22.4 = 10.585 = 10.59 atmospheres
0.2
Partial pressure of H = 0.91 × 22.4 = 4.92 atmospheres
2. 2.6g of Carbon dioxide and 4.8g of Oxygen were mixed in a 1 litre vessel. If the total
pressure of the mixture is 100 atmospheres, calculate the partial pressure of each gas
present in the container. (C = 12, O = 16)

Soln
Relative molecular mass of CO2 = 12 + (16 × 2) = 44
O2 = (16 × 2) = 32
2.6
Number of moles of Carbon dioxide = = 0.06 moles
44
4.8
Number of moles of Oxygen = = 0.15 moles
32
P = 100 atmospheres and Total number of moles = 0.21 moles
Partial pressure of a gas = Mole fraction of a gas × Total pressure
0.06
⇒ Partial pressure of CO2 = 0.21 × 100 = 38.57 atmospheres
0.15
Partial pressure of O2 = 0.21 × 100 = 71.43 atmospheres

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 3. At constant temperature, a vessel contains two gases, A and B and the pressure of A is
0.5 × 10-5mmHg and its mole fraction is 0.7.
i. Calculate the partial pressure of B.
ii. Calculate the total pressure exerted by a mixture of the gasses.

Soln

Let the partial pressure of gas A, = PA ,(0.5 × 10-5 mmHg)

Mole fraction of A (XA) = 0.7
Let the partial pressure of B = PB and mole fraction, XB
XA + XB = 1
⇒ XB = 1 − XA
= 1 – 0.7 = 0.3
But partial pressure of A = Mole fraction of A× Total pressure
⇒ 0.5 × 10-5 = 0.7 × total pressure
0.5 × 10−5
Total pressure = 0.7
= 7.14 × 10 – 6 mmHg
But PA + PB = Ptotal
PB = Ptotal − PA
6 -5
= (7.14 × 10 – − 0.5 × 10 )

= 2.14 × 10 −6mmHg

∴ The partial pressure of B is 2.14 × 10 −6mmHg

4. 400cm3 of gas A at 2 atmospheres and 200cm3 of gas B at 1 atmosphere are put in a 500cm3
container at the same time. Calculate the total pressure in the container.
Soln:

Let the partial pressure of A and B be PA and PB respectively

400cm3 of gas of A exerts 2 atmospheres
2 ×500
500cm3 of gas A will exert ( ) atmospheres = 2.5 atmospheres
400

200cm3 of gas B exerts 1 atmosphere

1 ×500
500cm3 of gas B will exert ( ) atmospheres = 2.5atmospheres
200

∴ Total pressure = 2.5 + 2.5, from PA + PB = Ptotal

= 5 atmospheres

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
REAL GASES AND IDEAL GASES
Ideal gas is one which obeys all gas laws accurately.
Have no intermolecular forces of attraction and also negligible volume.
Real (perfect) gas is one which doesn‟t obey the ideal gas equation.

This is because intermolecular forces of attraction have a significant effect on the pressure and
their volumes are not negligible. e.g. Ammonia, Helium, Nitrogen, Oxygen and Methane.

Recall the assumptions of the Kinetic theory of an ideal gas;

An ideal gas is made up of small invisible particles; molecules with negligible intermolecular
forces of attraction between them and occupy zero volume.
Gases tend towards ideal behavior at conditions of high temperature and low pressure.
However, at conditions of low temperatures and high pressures, deviation from ideal behavior
occurs.
Causes of deviation from ideal gas behavior
i. Intermolecular forces of attraction
An ideal gas is assumed to have negligible intermolecular forces of attraction, however
At high pressure;
 Vander Waal forces of attraction become more pronounced/ significant because
the molecules have insufficient energy to overcome the forces of attraction.
 Molecules become close together hence resulting into deviation from ideal gas
behavior.
 attractive forces between the molecules decreases volume occupied by the gas ,
gas molecules are very close together; real gas volume< ideal gas volume
At low temperatures;
 Energy of the molecules decreases, collision energy between molecules is
therefore low, intermolecular forces of attraction become more significant,
molecules become close together hence resulting into deviation from ideal gas
behavior.
ii. Co – volume (molecular volume, Vm)
At very high pressure, repulsive forces between the molecules/molecular sizes molecules
themselves become significant, increasing the volume occupied by the gas; real gas
volume > ideal gas volume.

COMPRESSIBILITY FACTOR (Z)

Is a measure of deviation of a real gas from ideal gas behavior.

PV
It is given by Z = RT where V= volume occupied by one mole of gas at temperature; T
and pressure P.

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 The value of Z for an ideal gas is one (constant) and it is represented by a straight line
parallel to the pressure axis.

For real gases, Z only approaches the value of 1 at very low pressures. At other pressures
Z may be greater than 1 (meaning that the gas cannot easily be compressed than an ideal
gas) or less than 1.
𝐏𝐕
A graph of 𝐧𝐑𝐓 against pressure for different gases at the same temperature

𝐏𝐕
Z = 𝐧𝐑𝐓 H2 O2 CH4
CO2
He

1 Ideal gas

Pressure (atmosphere)

Description of the curve

i. Carbon dioxide
The curve falls much more than that of methane; because increase in pressure
brings about stronger molecular attraction; which is due to the bigger molecular
size of CO2 compared to the methane molecule.
For both CO2 and CH4, the value of Z increases with increase in pressure because
the effect of molecular volume overcomes that of molecular attraction. The
deviation of CO2 is more significant than that of CH4.
ii. Hydrogen and noble gases
For H2 and noble/ rare gases, Z is greater than 1 which makes these gases very
difficult to compress.
Z increases from the beginning because deviation due to molecular volume is
greater than one due to molecular attraction at all pressures. The molecules of
hydrogen repel each other strongly thus this repulsion increases the volume of a
gas.

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 Example:
A plot of Z against pressure for one mole of methane of 273K is as shown below.
Use the graph to answer the questions that follow.

𝐏𝐕
Z = 𝐧𝐑𝐓 methane (273K)
C2H6

Ideal gas

200 400 600 800

Pressure (atmosphere)

QUESTIONS

a) Give reasons for the behavior of methane at 273K when the pressure is;
i. Lower than 200 atmospheres
ii. Higher than 200 atmospheres
b) On the same graph, sketch a graph of C2H6 at 273K and give reasons for your sketch, label
the graph X.
Solns:

(a) i. As pressure increases from Zero atmosphere, Van der Waal‟s forces of attractions
between CH4 molecules are very significant, due to the closeness of the molecules as
compared to molecular volume.
There is a slight fall in compression factor, Z due to the effect of molecular attraction.
ii) As the pressure increases beyond 200 atmospheres, the effect of molecular volume can no
longer be ignored and it overcomes that of molecular attraction in the gas. This leads to
an increase in the compressibility factor hence the rise of the graph.

(b) Reasons, having sketched

The graph falls much more for ethane than for methane ; the molecular size of the
molecules of ethane is more than that of CH4; because of increase in pressure,
stronger molecular attractions occur in ethane.
The compressibility factor rises as the pressure increases because the effect of molecular
volume in ethane is more significant than that in CH4.

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 Exercises:
1. The curves below show the deviations of some gases from ideal behavior.

O2 H2
CO2

PV (atm dm3)

Ideal gas

P (atmosphere)

i) State why Hydrogen shows a small deviation from ideal behavior compared to other
gases.
ii) Compare the deviation of O2 and CO2 from ideal behavior.
Solutions
i) Since Hydrogen has compressibility factor greater than 1, this makes it very difficult
to compress. It therefore shows a small deviation from ideal behavior due to effect of
molecular volume (co - volume) is greater than one due to molecular attraction at all
pressures since hydrogen molecules repel each other.
ii) The deviation of Carbon dioxide is more than that of Oxygen because carbon dioxide
has a higher relative molecular mass compared to that of Oxygen; increasing the
forces of attraction between Carbon dioxide molecules, reducing the volume occupied
by carbon dioxide molecules.

MODIFICATION OF THE IDEAL GAS EQUATION

a) Correction of the finite volume of the molecules.

Gas molecules occupy some volume and therefore space in which the molecules can move is
less than total volume of the gases by an equal amount equal to the finite volume of the
molecules.
Ideal volume (Vi) is obtained by subtracting the volume occupied by the molecules from the
total volume of the gas (V)
If b is the volume occupied by molecules in 1 mole of gas, the volume occupied by n
molecules of gas is nb.
Vi = (V − nb) _____________ (i)

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
b) Correction of attractive forces operating between the molecules.
A molecule within the interior of the gas is surrounded by other molecules equally in all
directions and thus the net force of attraction on it is zero.

Molecule

F=0

However, when it approaches the wall of the container, it experiences a retarding force due to the
attractive forces towards the centre of the vessel by the molecules inside the container.

F≠0

Due to this one sided molecular attraction, the force with which the molecule strikes the wall will
be less than the force if there was no inward pull and thus the measured pressure, P is less than
the Pressure Pi by an amount P’. i.e P = Pi – P’

⇒ Pi = P + P’

Force of attraction exerted on the molecule when it is going to strike the wall is directly
proportional to the number of molecules per unit volume in the body of the gas. Also, the
number of molecules striking the wall is proportional to the number of molecules per unit
volume of the gas.

If V is the volume occupied by n moles of the gas, then both these factors and hence the
n2
correction term P‟ is directly proportional to V 2

n2 𝐚n 2
Ie P‟ ∝ V 2 ⇒ P‟ = V2
where a – constant characteristic of a particular gas.

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
From Pi = P + P‟

𝐚n 2
⇒ Pi = P + _________________________ (ii)
V2

Therefore from PV = nRT, the modified equation is

𝐚𝐧𝟐
(P+ ) ( V − nb) = RT
𝐕𝟐
𝐚
For one mole, (P + ) ( V − b) = RT
𝐕𝟐

The constants a and b are known as Van der Waals constants and their magnitudes depend on the
type of the gas and units which pressure and volume are expressed.

Examples;

1. Calculate the pressure exerted by 1 mole of H2O vapor in 20L at 27OC Using;
a) Ideal gas equation
b) Van der waals equation.
The values of Van der waals constants a and b for water vapor are 5.464l2 atmosphere
mole−2 and 0.03049lmole−1 respectively.
Solution

T = (23 + 273) = 300K

Volume = 20liters

R = 0.082

a) PV = nRT
nRT 0.082 ×300
P= = = 1.23 Atmospheres
V 20

an 2
b) ( P + ) ( V − nb) = nRT
V2
an 2
(P + ) (V − nb) = RT
V2

RT a
P= −
V−b V2

0.082 ×300 5.464

= –
20−0.03049 20 2

= 1.2182 Atmospheres

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
CONDENSATION OF GASES

When a gas is sufficiently compressed, it condenses and turns into a liquid. The effect of
condensation of gases was studied by Andrews using CO2 gas subjected to various pressures
while changing temperatures.
Curves for a particular temperature (Isotherms were obtained by plotting Pressure against
temperature)
Isotherms for Carbon dioxide

Pressure D E

(Atmospheres)

H T4
P2 XXXXX

G XXXXXXXXX XX T3 Temperature
P1 xxX X X X X X X X X X X X xxxxx F

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX X X T2
C XX XX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
B

X X X X X X X X X X X AT1
Xx x x x x x x x xxx x x x x x x x x Volume (cm3)
KEY
Liquid
XXX Liquid and vapour
Permanent gas (Ideal gas)
Vapor

Points
i. A:
Carbon dioxide will be in the gaseous state and as pressure is gradually increased the
volume decreases hence between A and B, the gas Obeys Boyles law.

ii. B:
The gas begins to liquefy and there is a constant rapid decrease in volume with very little
increase in pressure. This is because the liquid formed has a very high density.
iii. C:
Liquefaction is complete and any further increase in pressure from C to D results in a
slight decrease of volume since liquids cannot be easily compressed compared to gases.
iv. Region BCH

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 Here the gas is in equilibrium with the liquid. At higher temperatures such as T2, a similar
path EFG is followed, however above T3 it is impossible to liquefy the gas however much
pressure is exerted. T3 is known as the critical temperature and the pressure P2 at which
it occurs is the Critical pressure.

Definition
Critical temperature: is the temperature above which a gas cannot be liquefied
however much pressure is exerted on it or reduced.
Critical pressure: is the minimum pressure required to liquefy the gas at critical
temperature.
NOTE: Liquefaction of a gas only occurs at low temperature below critical temperature
and at a high pressure.
Qn: UNEB: 1995:
The diagram shows Isotherms of a gas

Pressure

A 321 K

304K

B C

285K

Volume

i. a) What is the critical temperature of the gas?

304K

b) Which Isotherm almost represents the behavior of an ideal gas?

The Isotherm of 321K

c) i) What does the region ABC represent?

Region ABC represents the gas being in Equilibrium with the liquid.
iii) State one condition necessary for liquefying a gas

A temperature less than the critical temperature (below the critical temperature)

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 MOLE, RELATIVE ATOMICS MASS, RELATIVE MOLECULAR MASS

a) MOLE
 A mole is the amount of substance containing 6.02 × 1023 particles. These particles
can be atoms, ions or molecules.
6.02 × 1023 is called Avogadro‟s constant. (NA)
 A mole can also be defined as the amount of substance containing the same number
of particles as there carbon atoms in 12g of Carbon – 12 isotope.
 Therefore the Avogadro‟s constant 6.02 × 1023 is the number of particles present in 1
mole of a substance. E.g. 1 mole of H2 (molecule) is 6.02 × 1023molecules, 2 moles
of Na+ is 2 × 6.02 × 1023 ions etc.
b) RELATIVE ATOMIC MASS

On a Carbon scale, the relative atomic mass of an atom is defined as the mass of an atom
1
of element compared to of mass of 1 atom of C- 12 isotope i.e.
12

mass of 1 atom of any substance

R.A.M = 1
× mass of one atom of C−12 isotope
12

Thus the R.A.M of an element is the number of times the mass of one atom of an element
1
is heavier than 12 of the mass of 1 atom of C - 12 isotope.

Determination of R.A.M by mass spectrometry

Isotope:

These are atoms of an element with the same number of protons but with different
number of neutrons. E.g.

12 13 14
 Carbon; C, C, C
6 6 6
20 22
 Neon; Ne, Ne
10 10

35 37
 Chlorine Cl, Cl
17 17

79 81
 Bromine Br , Br
35 35

204 206 208 207

 Lead Pb , Pb, Pb, Pb, etc
82 82 82 82

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
In determining the R.A.M by mass spectrometer, the isotopes are separated by converting them
into rays of positive ions and making use of the differences in their masses.

Reason: Isotopes of an element have the same chemical properties since they have the same
number of electrons which take part in the chemical reaction.

Structure of a mass Spectrometer

Operation:

1. Vaporization and Ionisation of the sample:

The Sample is electrically heated through a tungsten film to form vapour. The vapourised
sample of an element is then passed into the Ionisation chamber where it is subjected to an
electron beam emitted by a hot filament. These electrons bombard the atoms of the
vapourised sample from which 1 or 2 electrons are stripped off to become positive ions. i.e.
M(g) ⟶ M+ + e, i.e. for 1 electron.
M(g) ⟶ M2+ + 2e, for 2eletrons
2. Acceleration stage
The positive ions produced are accelerated by electric field of varying potentials between the
plates P1 and P2.
Only positive ions with the same velocity but still with different charge – mass ratio will pass
through plate 2.
3. Deflection Stage:
The beam of positive ions emerging from P2 with the same velocity is deflected into a
circular path by strong magnetic field.
The angle of deflection, θ is directly proportional to the charge on each ion but inversely
proportional to the mass of each ion ie
e
θ = m where e – electron charge and m – mass

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
4. Deflection stage:

All the positive ions with the same charge to mass ratio are focused at the collector,
amplified into sizeable electric current which connects to the recorder at which the electric
current separates path which stress the peaks corresponding to the relative abundance of the
ions of a particular mass falling on the collector at that instant.

The R.A.M is calculated as the average mass of the isotopes according to their abundances
using the formula below
% abundance ×atomic mass of isotopes
R.A.M = 100

Examples.

1. A mass spectrum of chlorine is as shown below.

% abundance

100

75

50

25

Isotopes
35 37

Determine the RAM of chlorine.

Solution:
% abundance ×atomic mass of isotopes
R.A.M = 100

25 ×37 + (75 ×35)

= 100

= 35.5

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 2. An element Y has 3 naturally occurring isotopes whose isotopic masses and relative
abundances as shown below.
Isotopic mass R. abundances

23.98 78. 60

24.98 10.11

25.98 11.29

Calculate the average atomic mass

Solution
% abundance ×atomic mass of isotopes
R.A.M = 100

78.60 ×23.98 + 10.11 ×24.98 + (11.29 ×25.98)

= 100

= 24.3

3. A mass spectrum of Chlorine shows the molecular peaks at 70, 72 and 74.
a) Explain this observation
b) The peaks at 70, 72 and 74 are in the ratio of 9: 6: 1. Calculate the average atomic
mass of chlorine.
c) Calculate the relative abundance of Cl -35 and Cl -37

Solution:

a) Chlorine has two isotopes i.e. Cl-35 and Cl- 37. A peak is formed at 70 when two
atoms of Cl- 35 combine. A peak is formed at 72 when an atom of Cl – 35
combines with Cl-37.
A peak is formed at 74 when two atoms of chlorine- 37 combine.
b) Total ratio = 9 + 6 + 1
= 16
9
Ratio at 70 = × 100 = 𝟓𝟔. 𝟐𝟓%
16
6
Ratio at 72 = 16 × 100 = 𝟑𝟕. 𝟓%
9
Ratio at 74 = 16 × 100 = 𝟔. 𝟐𝟓%
% abundance ×atomic mass of isotopes
R.M.M = 100
𝟓𝟔.𝟐𝟓 ×𝟕𝟎 + 𝟕𝟐 ×𝟑𝟕.𝟓 + (𝟔.𝟐𝟓 ×𝟕𝟒)
= 𝟏𝟎𝟎

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 = 71

𝟕𝟏
RAM = = 35.5
𝟐

% abundance ×atomic mass of isotopes

c) RAM =
100
Let the %age abundance of 37 be x
And that of 35 be 100 – x
𝐱 ×37 + 100 –x ×35
⇒ 35.5 = 100
3550 = 37x + 3500 – 35x
50 = 2x
X = 25%
100 – x = 100 – 25 = 75%

4. Copper has RAM 63.55 and consists of two isotopes of mass numbers 63 and 65. Calculate the
%age abundances of the isotopes. UNEB 2001

Solution:
Relative atomic mass = 63.55
Mass numbers: 63 and 65
Let the relative % abundance of 63 be x
Let the relative abundance of 65 be (100− x)
% abundance ×atomic mass of isotopes
Using RAM =
100

63 ×𝐱 + 100 –x ×65
63.55 =
100

6355 = 63x + 6500 – 65x

X = 72.5%s

% abundance of isotope 63 = x = 72.5% and % abundance of isotope 65 = 100 – 75

= 27.5% 5.

5. On passing tetra chloromethane through a mass spectrometer, we obtain the spectrum

below.

cl ccl3+ ccl22+ ccl +

3

% abundance

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 12 12 1 23 12 3 4 Peaks
Interpretation

Group A:

 Due to one chlorine atom

 Line 1 is due to chlorine 35
 Line 2 is due to chlorine 37

Group B:

 Due to CCl3+
 Line 1 is due to CCl35, has a mass of (12 + 35) = 47 (highest peak)
 Line 2 is due to CCl37, has a mass of (12 + 37) = 49 (shortest peak)

Group C:

 Due to CCl2+
 Line 1 is due to CCl 35, Cl 35, mass of 82, (highest peak)
 Line 2 is due to CCl35, Cl37, mass of 86, the lowest peak.

Group D:

 Due to CCl+
3
 Line 1 is due to CCl35, Cl 35, Cl 35, mass of 117 (highest peak)
 Lien 2 is due to CCl 35, Cl 35, Cl 37, mass of 119 (second highest peak)
 Line 3 is due to CCl35, Cl37, Cl37, mass of 121 (third highest peak)
 Line 4 is due to CCl37, Cl37, Cl37, mass of 123 (lowest peak)

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
DETERMINATION OF R.M.M OF GASES AND VOLATILE LIQUIDS

i. Victor Meyer’s method for volatile liquids.

Set up

Procedure:

 Draw a few cm3 of air into a graduated syringe

 Pass steam through the outer jacket until the thermometer reading and the volume of the
air in the syringe becomes steady.
 Record this temperature, T℃ and volume of the air in the syringe V1cm3
 Fill the hypodermic syringe with about 1cm3 of liquid under investigation, ensuring that
all air is expelled from the needle being pushed through the self scaling cap of the
graduated syringe.
 Weigh the hypodermic syringe and its content
 Inject about 0.2cm3 of liquid into a larger syringe and withdraw the hypodermic syringe.
 Reweigh the hypodermic syringe and its contents
 The liquid injected into the graduated syringe will evaporate, vapour is formed. The final
volume of air + vapour in the graduated syringe should be recorded when the volume
becomes steady.
 Finally record the atmospheric pressure P.

Results:

 Mass of hypodermic syringe + volatile liquid before injection into the graduated syringe
= ag

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
  Mass of hypodermic syringe after injection of volatile liquid into the graduated syringe =
bg
 Mass of volatile liquid = (a - b)g
 Initial volume of graduated syringe = V1 cm3
 final volume of graduated syringe = V2 cm3
 volume of vapour (volatile liquid) = (V2 – V1) cm3

Treatment of results

The RMM of the volatile liquid can then be calculated from

m
PV = nRT, where n = M

mRT
⇒ PV =
M

mRT
M= PV

Example

1. A gas syringe containing 20.6cm3 of air at 48oC was injected with 0.246g of a volatile liquid
Q. The volume of the gas in the syringe was found to be 63.7cm3 at a pressure of 1.01 × 105
Nm-2. Calculate the R.M.M of volatile liquid Q.
Solution
Initial volume of air in the syringe = 20.6cm3
Final volume of air in syringe = 63.7cm3
Volume of vapour = (63.7 – 20.6) = 43.1cm3
T = 48 + 273 = 321K, m = 0.246g
mRT
Using PV = M

mRT 0.246×8.314 ×321

M= = 1.01 × 105 ×43.1 ×10−6
PV

M = 151g

2. When 0.16g of a volatile liquid P was injected into a gas syringe at 12OC and pressure
745mmHg, 51.5cm3 of liquid vapour was produced. Calculate the R.M.M of P.
Solution:
Initial mass = 0.16g T = 12 + 273 =285K
P = 745mmHg = 99325.188Pa
R = 8.314Jmol-1K-1
V = 51. 5cm3 = 51.5× 10-6m3

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 mRT
⇒ Using PV =
M

mRT 0.16 ×8.314 ×285

M= = 99325.188 × 51.5× 10−6 = 71.12g
PV

3. By vapourising 0.1g of a liquid at 180OC and 1.01 × 105 Pa pressure, 25cm3 of vapour were
obtained. Find the R.M.M of the liquid.
Solution:
Mass = 0.1g
T = (180 + 273) = 453K
Pressure = 1.01 × 105Pa
Volume = 25 × 10 -6m3
mRT
⇒ Using PV = M
mRT 0.1 ×8.314×453
M= = 1.01 × 105 ×25 × 10 −6 = 149.2g
PV
ii. Regnault’s method for gases.
This is the modification of Meyer‟s method.
It involves direct weighing of the gases.

Setup:

Procedure:

 Tap 1 is closed when tap 2 is open and the vessel is evacuated by connecting tap 2 to the
vacuum pump.
 Tap 2 is closed and the mass of the empty vessel is determined
 Tap 1 is then opened while keeping tap 2 closed and the vessel is filled with the gas of
known volume.
 The weight of the vessel filled with the gas is then determined

Results:

Mass of empty vessel = Xg

Mass of vessel + gas = yg
Mass of the gas alone= (y - x)g

Treatment of results
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 mRT
⇒ Using PV =
M
𝐦𝐑𝐓
∴ M= 𝐏𝐕
Where M = Relative Molecular Mass of the gas.

NOTE: In using this method, the following precautions should be taken:

 The gas must be pure

 All weighings should be done at the same temperature and pressure.
 All vessels must be completely evacuated

EMPIRICAL AND MOLECULAR FORMULAE

The empirical formula of a compound is the simplest formula which expresses the ratio of the
number of atoms of the elements present in the compound.

Molecular formula is one which shows the actual number of atoms of the elements present in a
molecule/ compound.

The empirical formula can be obtained from

i. Percentage composition
ii. Data obtained from combustion analysis.
Knowing the molecular mass of the compound, then the molecular formula of the
compound can also be obtained.
Relationship between Relative Density and RMM
mas of a given volume of gas
Relative density (vapour density) = mass of an equal volume of hydrogen

mass of n−molecules of a gas

= mas of n−molecules of hydrogen

mass of 1 molecule of gas

= mass of 1 molecule of hydrogen

But RMM = mass of 1 mole of a gas

RMM
∴ R.D = , mass of 1 molecule of H2
2

RMM = R.D × 2

Molecular formula can either be the same as empirical formula or just a multiple of it i.e.
molecular formula = (Empirical formula)n. where n = 1

Molecular formula = empirical formula

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
Calculation of Empirical Formula and Molecular Formula

a) From percentage composition

1. An organic compound Q contains 66.7% Carbon, 11.1% hydrogen and the rest is Oxygen. If
the Relative vapour density of Q is 36, determine its molecular formula. (H = 1, O = 16, C =
12)
% composition of O2 = 100 – (66.7 + 11.1)
= 22.2%
Elements C H O
% composition 66.7 11.1 22.2
Moles of atoms 66.7 11.1 22.2
12 1 16
5.55833 11.1 1.3875
Simplest Mole 5.5583 11.1 1.3875
1.3875 1.3875 1.3875
ratios
4 8 1

∴ empirical formula: = C4H8O

(Empirical formula) n = molecular mass
(C4H8O) n = R.D × 2
(C4H8O) n = 36 × 2
48n + 8n + 16n =72
n=1
∴ molecular formula = C4H8O

2. A compound W contains Carbon, Hydrogen and Oxygen. Elemental analysis shows that
54.5% is carbon, 9.09% is Hydrogen and the rest is Oxygen.
a) Calculate the empirical formula
b) 0.542g of W occupies 148cm3 at 20OC and 740mmHg. Calculate the molecular mass
of W which produces effervescence with NaHCO3.
Solution:
% composition of Oxygen = 100 – (54.5 + 9.09)
= 36.41%
Carbon = 54.5%
Hydrogen = 9.09%
Elements C H O

% composition 54.5 9.09 36.41

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 Moles of atoms 54.5 9.09 36.41
12 1 16
4.54167 9.09 2.275625

Mole ratios 4.54167 9.09 2.275625

2.275625 2.275625 2.275625
1.9958 ≈ 2 3.995≈4 1

Empirical formula = C2H4O

b) Mass = 0.542g
Volume = 148cm3 = 148 × 10−6m3
T = 20OC = 20 + 273 = 293K
Pressure = 740mmHg = 98658.576Pa
Using PV = nRT
m
But n = M
mRT
⟹ PV = M
mRT 0.524 ×8.314×293
M= = 98658 .576 ×148 ×10 −6
PV
= 87.42g
From (empirical formula)n = molecular mass
(C2H4O)n= 87.42
24n + 4n + 16n = 87.42
44n = 87.42
n = 1.987 ≈ 2
Molecular formula = (E.F) n
= (C2H4O)2
= C4H8O2
UNEB 2007
1. Compound R contains Cobalt 24.8% Chlorine,29.8% and water 45.4%
i. Calculate the empirical formula
ii. Determine the molecular formula of R (RFM = 237.9), Co = 58.9 , Cl = 35.5, H2O =
18)
2. Analysis of blue vitriol crystals yielded the following percentage composition, Cu =
25.8%, S = 12.8%, O = 25.6% and H2O of crystallization 36.1%. What is the empirical
formula of the crystal (Cu = 63.5, S = 32, O = 16, H = 1)
3. A compound Q contains 62.1% carbon, 10.3% hydrogen and the rest being Oxygen.
(vapour density of Q = 2.59 × 10−3 )g/cm3 at STP).

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 a) Determine the empirical formula of Q
(b) Molecular formula of Q

B) From data from combustion analysis

1. (a) When 8.8g of a hydrocarbon Z was burnt in excess air, 14.4g of water and 13.44dm3
of CO2 were obtained at STP. Determine the Empirical Formula of Z.
(b) The vapor density of Z is 22. Write the name and the molecular formula of Z.

(UNEB 2004)

Solution:
a) Mass of H2O =14.4g
Volume of CO2 = 13.44dm3
Mass of compound = 8.3g
RMM of H2O = 2 + 16 = 18
2
Mass of H2 = 18 × 14.4 = 1.6g
RMM of CO2 = 44
22.4dm3 of CO2 → 44g
44
13.44dm3 → 22.4 × 13.44
Mass of CO2 = 26.4g
12
Mass of C = × 26.4 g = 7.2g
44
7.2
% of Carbon = × 100 = 81.82%
8.8
1.6
% of hydrogen = 8.8 × 100 = 18.18%

Element C H

% composition 81.82 18.18

Moles of atoms 81.82 18.18

12 1
6.818 18.18

Mole ratios 6.818 18.18

6.818 6.818
(1 2.66)3
=3 7.98 ≈ 8

E.F = C3H8
b) RMM = R.D × 2
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 = 22 × 2 = 44
From (E.F) n = molecular mass
(C3H8) n = 44
36n + 8n = 44
n=1
∴ Molecular formula = C3H8
NB: For fractions/ decimals multiply the simplest ratio by factor to get rid of the decimal
numbers.
1. 0.236g of an organic compound V on combustion gave 0.528g of Carbon dioxide and
0.324g of water. If 0.295g of V at STP gave 56cm3 of Nitrogen gas, determine the
molecular formula of V (RMM of V = 59).
Solution:
Mass of V = 0.236g
Mass of CO2 = 0.528g
Mass of H2O = 0.324g
12
Mass of Carbon = 44 × 0.528 = 0.144g
2
Mass of hydrogen = 18 × 0.324 = 0.036g
1 mole of N2 = 14 × 2 = 28g
22400cm3 ⟶ 28g of N2
28 ×56
56cm3 ⟶ of N2 = 0.07g
22400
If 0.295g of V contains 0.07g of N2
0.07 ×0.236
⟹ 0.236g of V contains g of N2 = 0.056g
0.295

Element C H N

% composition 81.82 18.18 0.056

Moles of atoms 0.144 0.036 0.056

12 1 14
0.012 0.036 0.004

Mole ratios 0.012 0.036 0.004

0.004 0.004 0.004
=3 9 1

E.F = C3H9N
From (empirical formula)n = relative molecular mass
(C3H9N)n =59
(12×3)n +(9×1)n +(14×1)n =59
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 59n =59
n=1
Molecular formula, C3H9N

2. When 0.13g of a chloride of Fe was vaporized at 600K and 1 atmosphere, 20cm3 of

vapour was formed.

a) Calculate the relative molecular mass of FeCl (Iron chloride).

b) i Determine the MF of Iron Chloride.
ii Write the structural formula of the Iron Chloride. (Fe = 56, Cl =35.5)

Mass of Iron Chloride = 0.13g

Temperature = 600K. R = 8.314Jmol-1K-1
Pressure = 1 atmosphere = 101325Pa
Volume of vapour = 20cm3 = 2 × 10−5m3
Using PV = nRT
given mass m
But n = mass =M
number
mRT
⟹ PV = M
mRT 0.13 ×8.314 ×600
M= = 101325 ×2×10 −5
PV
= 320.0059215

≈ 320g

b) i)(Empirical formula) n = molar mass

⟹ (FeCl3) n = 320

(56 + (35.5 × 3)) n = 320

n = 1.969 = 2
Molecular formula = (FeCl3) 2 = Fe2Cl6
ii) Structural formula of Iron chloride, Fe2Cl6
DETERMINATION OF MOLECULAR FORMULA OF HYDROCARBON BY EUDIOMETER
Determination of MF of hydrocarbon by a Eudiometer uses Avogadro‟s hypothesis,
“equal volumes of different gases at the same temperature and pressure contain the same number
of molecules”.
i.e. doubling the number of molecules present doubles the volume at constant pressure.
Procedure:
 Unknown volume of gaseous hydrocarbon is exploded with excess oxygen over mercury in a
eudiometer.
 The vapour is then cooled and contraction in volume occurs due to condensation of water vapour
to form liquid vapour.
 The resultant volume left is due to CO2 formed and the unused O2

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
  The volume of CO2 is determined by adding aqueous NaOH or KOH which absorbs all the CO2.
Examples:
1. 20cm3 of a gaseous hydrocarbon X were exploded with 120cm3 of Oxygen. After the explosion, the
volume of gases remaining was 90cm3 and this decreased to 50cm3 on treatment with aqueous KOH.
Calculate the M.F of the hydrocarbon X.
Solution:
Let the hydrocarbon be CxHy
Equation of combustion;
y y
CxHy + ( x + 4) O2 (g) ⟶ XCO2 + 2 H2O
Volume of hydrocarbon = 20cm3
Initial volume of Oxygen = 120cm3
Residual gas volume = 90cm3
Volume of unused O2 = 50cm3
Volume of CO2 formed = (90− 50) =40cm3
Volume of O2 used = (120− 50) = 70cm3
y y
CxHy + ( x + 4) O2 (g) ⟶ XCO2 + 2 H2O
Vol. of cpnt. 20cm3 70cm3 40cm3
20 70 40
Mole ratio 20 20 20

7
1 2
2

By comparison; x = 2
y 7
X+4= 2

8+y 7
4
= 2

8 + y = 14 ⟹ y = 2

Molecular formula = C2H6

2. 15cm3 of gaseous hydrocarbon Z was exploded with 105cm3 of excess O2. The residual gas
occupied 75cm3. On addition of conc. KOH, there was a fall in volume to 30cm3. Determine
the molecular formula of Z.
Solution:
Let the hydrocarbon be CxHy
Equation of combustion:
y y
CxHy + ( x + 4) O2 (g) ⟶ XCO2 + 2 H2O(l)
Volume of hydrocarbon = 15cm3
Volume of O2 (initially) = 105cm3
Residual gas volume = 75cm3
Volume of Oxygen unused 30cm3
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 Volume of oxygen used = (105 − 30) = 75cm3
Volume of carbon dioxide formed = (75 − 30) = 45cm3

y y
CxHy + ( x + 4) O2 (g) ⟶ XCO2 + 2 H2O

vol of cpnt 15cm3 75cm3 45cm3

15 75 45
Mole ratio
15 15 15

1 5 3

By comparing;
X=3
y
X+4=5
y
3+4=5
12+y
=5
4
Y=8
∴ Molecular formula = C3H8 , Propane.
3. When 142cm3 of a hydrocarbon Q of molecular mass 58g was exploded with excess O2 and
cooled to room temperature, the volume of the residual gas 694cm3. On treatment with conc.
KOH solution, the volume decreased to 126cm3.
a) Determine the molecular formula of Q.
b) Write the structural formula and IUPAC name of all possible isomers of Q.

Solution

a) Let the hydrocarbon = CxHy

Volume of CxHy =142cm3
Molecular mass = 58g.
Volume of residual gas = 694cm3
Volume of O2 =126cm3
Volume of CO2 = (694 − 126)cm3 = 568cm3
y y
CxHy + ( x + 4) O2 (g) ⟶ XCO2 + 2 H2O
142cm3 568cm3
142 568
Mole ratio 142 142

1 4

By comparison, x = 4
But CxHy = 58
But C4Hy = 58
48 + y = 58
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 y = 10
Molecular formula = C4H10

b) i) C4H10 (Butane)

(ii) 2-Methyl Propane.

4. 30cm3 of a gaseous hydrocarbon W was mixed with 140cm3 of O2 and exploded. After
cooling to room temperature and pressure, the residual gas occupied 95cm3. On
absorption with conc. KOH solution there was a fall in volume by 60cm3. Determine the
molecular formula of W.
solutions

No. 4

Let the Hydrocarbon be CxHy

Volume of CxHy = 30cm3
Residual gas = 95cm3
Volume of Carbon dioxide formed = 60cm3
Volume of Oxygen initially = 140cm3
Volume of oxygen (unused) = (95− 60) = 35cm3
Volume of used oxygen = (140− 35) = 105cm3
Equation of combustion
y y
CxHy + ( x + 4) O2 (g) ⟶ XCO2 + 2 H2O
Volumes: 30cm3 105cm3 60cm3
30 105 60
Mole ratios 30 30 30
7
1 2
2

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
By comparison;

X=2
Using:
y 7
x+4=2
y 7
⟹ 2+4=2
8+y 7
=
4 2
y=6

∴ Molecular formula of W = C2H6

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 ATOMIC STRUCTURE
There are three fundamental particles within an atom i.e. protons, neutrons and
electrons, each of which differs from the other in terms of mass and charge i.e.

Particle Symbol Relative charge Relative mass

Protons P + 1

electrons E − 1
1840
neutrons N 0 1

PRODUCTION OF CATHODE RAYS(ELECTRONS)

 The electric nature of matter was studied by JJ Thomson from his study of the
phenomenon of discharge through gases at very low pressure.
 At ordinary pressures, gases are electrical insulators but when subjected to very high
voltages at very low pressures, they break down and conduct electricity.
Illustration:

Procedure:
 Two metal electrodes are fitted in a discharge tube containing a gas e.g hydrogen gas.
 A side tube T is also provided to communicate with the vacuum pump.
 With sufficiently high voltage of about 5000V, and the pressure of the gas is reduced to
about 700pa, a bright luminous discharge takes place.
 Pressure inside the discharge tube is adjusted by the help of a vacuum pump to less than
one pascal (1Pa), the luminous discharge is replaced by only faintly luminous rays which
proceed from the cathode; hence are called Cathode rays.
PROPERTIES OF CATHODE RAYS
 Travel in straight lines and cast/give off a sharply defined shadow on the screen of the
objects placed in their path.

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
  Produce mechanical effect. This is shown by placing a light paddle wheel in the path of
cathode rays; the wheel rotates in the direction away from the cathode. This means that
the cathode rays are particles which have mass.
 Deflected by electric field towards the positive plates showing that they are negatively
charged.
 Deflected by magnetic fields in the direction that shows that they are negatively charged.
 Causes the screen to fluoresce with a green glow.
 Pass through a thin sheet of aluminum foil which even the smallest gaseous atoms
(Helium) or molecules (Hydrogen) cannot penetrate.
NB: Cathode rays are streams of negatively charged particles, travelling away from the
cathode in a straight line.

DISCOVERY OF PROTONS
Existence of protons (positively charged particles) in a cathode ray tube was
demonstrated by boring small holes in the cathode. When an electric discharge was
passed through the cathode ray tube, not only cathode rays are formed ; also rays that
originate from the cathode but move in opposite direction.

ILLUSTRATION

These rays give a red glow; are deflected by both magnetic and electric field in the
direction opposite to that of the electrons; showing that they consist of positively charged
particles called Protons.
They are produced when the electrons are bombarded with gas molecules in the tube i.e.
𝔢 + H2 ⟶2 𝐻 + + 3e

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
DISCOVERY OF NEUTRONS
 Beryllium is bombarded with alpha particles,
 Particles given off were not deflected at all by electric and magnetic fields; therefore
possessed no charge.
 Particles are therefore called neutrons; since they were neutral; have the same mass as
protons.
9 4 1 12
4𝐵𝑒 + 2𝐻𝑒 0𝑛 + 6𝐶

NUCLEUS OF AN ATOM
The nucleus of an atom consists of protons (positively charged) and neutrons (have no
charge)
Protons and neutrons are collectively called nucleons and the sum of of the number of
protons and neutrons in the atoms nucleus is called mass number or nucleon number.
The number of protons in the nucleus of an element is called the atomic number.
Notation for atoms
A
The notation for an atom X is X where;
Z
X – symbol of an a atom
A – mass number
Z – Atomic number
19
E.g; a symbol for fluorine atom with mass number 19 and Atomic number 9 is; F
9
19
A symbol of fluorine atom can also be written as F with the atomic number
omitted.

RUTHERFORD’S MODEL OF AN ATOM

Nuclear model of an atom was studied by;

 passing a stream of positively charged particles (alpha particles) from a Radium source
through a thin metal foil of Golf/ platinum.

Diagram:

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
Observations;
1. Most of ∝ - particles passed through the gold foil undeflected.
2. Few deviated through small angles
3. Extremely very few were scattered through/ deflected back through 180O
Conclusions
1. Most of the atom is an empty space.
2. Atoms contain negative charges (electrons)
3. Alpha particles suffer head on collision with the positive charge concentrated in small
fraction of the nucleus.
RADIOACTIVITY
Is the natural spontaneous disintegration (decay) of unstable nuclei by emission of alpha, beta
and gamma rays to form stable nuclei.
Stable nuclei do not undergo radioactive decay while unstable nuclei undergo radioactive decay.

PROPERTIES OF ALPHA, BETA AND GAMMA RAYS

Properties Alpha particles Beta particles Gamma rays

1 Nature Essentially a helium Consists of negatively Are electromagnetic
4 charged electrons radiations without
nucleus ( He) with 2 1
2 each of mass 1840 charge but with very
positive charges and short wavelength
mass number 4 units 0
units. Symbol ℮
−1
2 Deflection by both Deflected in Deflected to the Not deflected since
magnetic and directions showing positive pole they are not charged
electric fields they are positively
charged i.e. deflected
to the negative pole.
3 Extent of deflection Deflected to a less Deflected to a greater Not deflected;
extent since it is extent since it is
heavier. lighter.
4 Extent of Least penetrating Has a fairly high Have the highest
penetration power penetrating power. penetrating power as
i.e. penetrates a thin they move with
sheet of aluminium almost the velocity of
foil light and a lot of
energy.
5 Ionizing power Have a high ionizing Less ionizing power A very low ionising
power such that they than the alpha power.
can even ionize a gas particles.

EFFECTS OF ∝, 𝛃 AND 𝛄 EMISSIONS ON ATOMIC AND MASS NUMBERS OF

NUCLEI FORMED
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 𝟒
a) Emission of an alpha particle ( 𝐇𝐞 )
𝟐
 All disintegrations by emission/loss of an alpha particle decrease the mass number of
the new nucleus by 4 units and atomic number by 2 units.
 This displaces the new nucleus formed by two places backwards/ left in the periodic
table e.g.
14 4 10 238 4 234
C ⟶ He + Be, ∪ ⟶ He + Th
6 2 4 92 2 90
220 4 216 226 4 222
Rn ⟶ He + Po, Ra ⟶ He + Rn etc
86 2 84 88 2 86
b) Emission of Beta particles
Emission / loss of a beta particle increase the atomic number of the new nuclei formed by
1 unit but has no change on the mass number.
The new nucleus formed is displaced 1 position ahead/ on the right in the periodic table.
e.g.
14 0 14 234 0 234
C⟶ 𝐞+ N, Th ⟶ e+ Pa
6 −1 7 92 −1 91
220 220 0
Rn ⟶ Fr + 𝐞
86 88 −1

c) Emission of a gamma ray

The loss of gamma rays is accompanied by release of energy but there is no change in the
identity of the new nucleus formed. i.e.
226 226
Ra ⟶ Ra + γ + energy
88 88

NB: When the emitted particle is known, the new nucleus formed is identified by its
atomic number and NOT mass number.

BALANCING RADIOACTIVE EQUATIONS:

In balancing radioactive equations, the

 sum of the atomic numbers on the left should equal to the sum of atomic numbers
on the right hand side.
 sum of the mass numbers on the left hand side should be equal to that on the right
hand side. e.g.
1. Complete the following reactions
6 1 3 𝟒
i. Li + ∩ → H + 𝐇𝐞
3 0 1 𝟐
107 1 𝟏𝟎𝟖
ii. Ag → ∩ → Ag
47 0 𝟒𝟕
14 1 𝟏𝟑
iii. N→ H+ 𝐂
7 1 𝟔
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 232 228 228 228
iv. Th α X β Y β Z
90 88 89 90
Identify X, Y and Z

Solution:

232 4 228
Th ⟶ He + X
90 2 88

X: Radium

228 0 228
X⟶ e + Y
88 −1 89

Y: Actinium

225 0 228
Y⟶ e+ Z
89 −1 90

Z: Thorium

a) Name the three main types of radioactive emissions

(b) State two properties of any 1 of the emissions named in (a) above. UNEB 1994:

(c ) Complete the equation of the decay of Bismuth(UNEB 2001)

214 0 𝟐𝟏𝟒
Bi ⟶ ℮+ Po
83 −1 𝟖𝟒

UNEB 2005(6)

a) Complete the following equations for the nuclear reactions

239 1 91 146 𝟏
i. Pu + ∩ → Y+ Cs + 3 ∩
94 0 39 55 𝟎
239 239 𝟎
ii. ∪⟶ Np + ℮
92 93 −𝟏
226 4 𝟐𝟐𝟐
iii. Ra ⟶ He + Rn
88 2 𝟖𝟔
UNEB 1998 (1)

233 β 𝟐𝟑𝟑 α 𝟐𝟐𝟗

a) Pa + 𝐔 + Th
91 𝟗𝟐 𝟗𝟎
207 207 𝟎
b) Ti Pb + ℮
81 82 −𝟏

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
UNEB 2006

Complete the following equations for the nuclear reaction.

35 1 1 𝟑𝟓
1. (i) Cl + ∩ H+ S
17 0 1 𝟏𝟔
214 𝟐𝟎𝟔
(ii) Bi 3β + 2α + Pb
83 𝟖𝟐
2 10 1 𝟏𝟏
(iii) H+ B ⋂+ C
1 5 0 𝟔
24 𝟐𝟎
2. (i) Mg ∝+ Ne
11 𝟏𝟎
113 1 𝟏𝟏𝟒
(ii) Cd + ∩ Cd
48 0 𝟒𝟖

RADIOACTIVE DECAY
Most naturally occurring and manmade heavy isotopes are unstable and hence the nuclei
decay spontaneously to form a more stable element after emitting an alpha/ beta particle.
The rate at which a radioactive atom decays is directly proportional to the number of
radioactive atoms/nuclei present at that time i.e. Rate of decay α number of atoms (N)
If No is the initial number of atoms at time t = 0 and Nt = number of atoms remaining
after time t = t, then
− dN
∝N
dt
− dN
⟹ = kN where k – Decay constant.
dt
By separating variables;
− dN
= kdt
N
Integrating between limits of No and Ne and t = 0 to t = t.
Nt −dN t
∫No N = ∫0 kdt
Nt −1 t
∫N0 N dN = k ∫0 dt
𝑁𝑡 t
−In𝑁 = kt
𝑁𝑜 0
−InNt – - InNo = kt
−InNt + ln No = kt
⟹ ln No − ln Nt = kt
No
ln Nt = kt

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 But ln = 2.303log10
No
2.303 log Nt = kt
𝐍𝐨
A graph of 𝐥𝐨𝐠 𝐍𝐭 against time

No
log Nt

K
Slope = 2.303

Time (s)

A graph of 𝐥𝐧 𝐍𝐭 against time

ln Nt ln No

Slope=-K

Time (s)

NB: If counts are used;

Co
2.303 log = kt
Ct

Where Co = counts at time, t = 0

Ct = counts at time, t = t

HALF LIFE
It‟s the time required for the amount of a radioactive material to be reduced to half its initial
value.

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
Half life is independent of the original concentration i.e. the time taken for 1,000,000 unstable
nuclei to disintegrate to half the original amount is the same as the time taken for one nucleus to
decay to half the nucleus.
No
From 2.303log Nt = kt
No
At half life; Nt = , t = t½
2
2.303log 2 = k t ½
2.303 log 2
t½= K

A graph of Nt against time has the shape below

Nt
𝑵𝒐
𝟐

No
4

No
8

Time(s)

 If (t ½ − 0) = t ¼ − t ½ = half life of 1st order kinetics

NB: Radioactive decay is a 1st order process i.e. the rate of decay is proportional to the
concentration raised to power 1.

 Count rate is the measure of the amount of the nuclide present at each time.
 Nuclide is a nuclear species with a specific atomic and mass number.
 Decay constant is the number of atoms disintegrating per unit time.

Examples
1
1. When a radioactive isotope was stored for 42 days, it retained of its original activity.
8
Calculate the half life of the isotope.(UNEB 2006)
Solution:

Time = 42 days
Let the initial activity (No) be x at t = 0
1
At time, t = t, Nt = 8 x
No
Using 2.303 log Nt = kt
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 x
2.303 log 1 = k.42
x
8
2.303 log 8 = 42k
k = 0.0495 day −1
0.693
t½ = K
0.693
= 0.0495
= 13.99
𝐭 ½ ≈ 14 days
Assignment.

1. The half life of Bismuth is 19.7 minutes. Determine the time taken for 43% by mass of
Bismuth to decay. 2009 UNEB

0.693
.2 Given that λ = where λ is a decay constant and t ½ is the half life. Radium has a half
t½

life of 1620 years. Calculate the

i. Value of λ
ii. The fraction of the sample of Radium remaining after 100 years.

238
3. U is radioactive and undergoes an alpha decay to give an isotope for another
92
element.

a) Find the mass number and atomic number of the element formed and hence the
element.
238
b) The half life of Uranium, U is 4.8 × 109 years, how many years will be required
92
for 2000 atoms to decay to 497 atoms.
4. The disintegration rate constant for the conservation of a radioactive Sodium to
Magnesium is 2.85 × 10−3 per second. Calculate the fraction of the original sample
after 150s.
5. The half life of a radioactive substance Y is 529 minutes. If after 30 minutes, the activity
of the sample Y was found to be 285 counts per minute. Calculate initial concentration of
Y.
6. The beta activity from 1g of Carbon from wood that was cut recently was registered
0.204 counts/ second. 1g of the specimen of Carbon prepared from wood taken from a
long strip gave 0.177 counts per second. Estimate the age of the strip to the nearest 50
years. (Half life of Carbon is 5580 years).

ARTIFICIAL RADIOACTIVITY

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 New unstable (radioactive nuclei) is artificially formed by bombarding some stable nuclei with
energetic particles e.g. protons, neutrons, alpha particles, etc.

Artificial radioactivity gives rise to two processes namely;

i. Nuclear fusion
ii. Nuclear fission

i. Nuclear fusion;
Is the process whereby small/light nuclei combine to form heavy nuclei accompanied by
release of large quantities of energy e.g.
2 3 𝟒 1
a) H + H He + ∩ + energy
1 1 𝟐 0
42 4 45 1
b) K + He Sc + ∩ + energy
19 2 21 0
14 4 1 17
c) N + He H + O
7 2 1 8
1 14 14 1
d) ∩ + N C + H
0 7 6 1

ii. Nuclear fission;

 This is a process which involves splitting/ breaking a heavy nuclei into smaller
nuclei accompanied by a large release of energy.
 Fission reactions are usually initiated by fast moving particles such as neutrons
e.g.
𝟐𝟑𝟓 1 92 141 1
 K+ ∩ K+ Ba + 3 ∩ + energy
92 0 36 56 0
235
 The neutrons formed can also bombard more Uranium U nuclei producing
192
more neutrons and therefore the reaction continues until it is stopped. The above
type of reaction is called a chain reaction since it consists of repeated steps
which are initiated by one step.
 The energy released at each step is so large and it is used to form atomic bombs
and even to form the nuclear power stations.
 The energy released is in accordance with Einstein‟s law.

E = mc2

Where E = energy released

M = loss in mass

C = velocity of light

NUCLEAR STABILITY
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
The stability of the nucleus is the measure of the extent to which the nucleus remains
undistorted.

Stability of the nucleus is attained when the number of protons in an atom is approximately equal
to the number of neutrons i.e. ratio of neutrons: protons = 1.

Stable nuclei is one;

 having number of protons approximately equal to the number of neutrons/ neutrons

slightly higher than protons.
 does not undergo radioactive disintegration.
 containing adequate number of neutrons to “ dilute” the concentration of positive
charges due to proportions which would repel one another and cause unstability in the
nucleus.

Nuclides with even number of protons/ neutrons/ both are more stable than those with odd
number of protons/ neutrons.

Unstable nuclides are atoms;

 having number of neutrons much greater than the number of protons/ have a high
number of protons than neutrons.
 undergo radioactive decay emitting alpha and beta particles to attain stability.

Factors affecting nuclear stability

i. n: p ratio
 Stability of a nucleus depends on the neutron proton ratio, because of the
exchange of energy between the neutrons and the protons.
 The ratio n : p increases with increase in atomic number and reaches a maximum
value when the number of protons is equal to the number of neutrons.

A graph showing the r/ship between number of neutrons and the number of protons

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
Number of
Neutrons 180

160

140 Y
120 Stability zone

100

80 X
60 Z
40

20

20 40 60 80 100
Number of protons
 The graph shows a stable belt (shaded area) or stability region or zone or band running
diagonally, starts to curve upwards at atomic number 20 and stops abruptly at atomic
number 83.
 All the known stable nuclei lie within the stability zone.
 A long the dotted line, the nuclides have equal number of protons and neutrons ie n: p ≈
1.
 Nuclei at x, y and z outside the stability zone are unstable and therefore undergo
radioactive decay to form isotopes which lie in the stability zone, by electron capture,
beta emission and alpha emission.

Nuclide at x:

 Neutron number > proton number

 Can lower neutron to proton ratio and move towards the stability zone by emitting a beta
particle; this decreases the number of neutrons and increases the number of protons in the
nucleus i.e.

A A 0
X P+ ℮
Z Z+1 −1

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
  During emission of a beta particle, one neutron splits up to form a proton and an electron
(ejected as a beta particle)
1 1 0
∩ H+ ℮
0 1 −1
The proton is retained in the nucleus so as the atomic number of the resulting isotope is
increased by 1 and thus its nucleus come nearer/ enter the stability zone.

Nuclide at Z

 Have low n: p ratio i.e. n: p is less than 1, the proton number is greater than the neutron
number.
 Such nuclei can lower their ratio and move towards the zone of stability by electron
capture or positron (positive electron) emission.
 This reduces the number of protons and increases the number of neutrons
A A 0
 Z P+ ℮ (positron emission)
Z Z−1 +1
A 0 A
 Z + ℮ P (electron capture)
Z −1 Z−1
e.g.
1 0 1
H + ℮ ∩
1 −1 0
1 1 0
H ∩+ ℮
1 0 +1
Nuclide at Y.

 Have atomic (proton) number greater or equal to 83 and are heavy, lie beyond the upper
right edge of the stability zone.
 Gain stability by emission of alpha particles which decreases both number of protons
and neutrons.
A A−4 4
Y⟶ P + He
Z Z−2 2
NB: Very heavy nuclei cannot achieve stability with a single emission. Such unstable
nuclei undergo a series of emission called radioactive series or nuclear disintegration
series until a stable nucleus is produced.

ii. Half life

The larger the half life the more stable the nuclei and vice-versa

iii. Atomic number/ mass number

Stability of the nucleus decreases as the atomic/ mass number increases. Atoms with
atomic number 83 are too heavy to be stable.
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 iv. Binding energy.
 This is the energy given out when a nucleus is formed from the individual
neutrons and protons or it is required to separate the nucleus into individual
nucleons.
 The greater the binding energy, the more stable the nucleus e.g the binding energy
of Carbon 14 isotopes is less than binding energy for carbon 12 isotope; thus
Carbon-12 isotope is more stable.

NB: The mass of the nucleus is slightly less than the masses of the protons and
neutrons of which it is composed.

 The difference in mass is called mass defect which is transferred into binding
energy of the nucleus.
 Einstein‟s equation gives the relationship between mass and energy.
 The mass defect is the source of binding energy
 Since the constant, C2 has a large numerical value, even a very small loss in mass
is equivalent to release of large amount of energy. This is the origin of the
substantial binding energy of the nuclei and the reason why nuclear reactions are
an important source of energy.

A graph showing the relationship between binding energy and mass number

Binding energy per

nucleon
(E × 1013 ) 15

10

20 40 60 80 100 Mass number (g)

Interpretation

 Elements with mass numbers 60 are the most stable.

 Elements with heavier nuclei than this should be able to split into lighter and stable nuclei
with release of energy.
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
  Elements with lighter nuclei than 60 should be able to combine if repulsion between
nuclear charges can overcome to form heavier nuclei with release of energy. These
processes are called fission and fusion respectively.

QN: UNEB 1996

a) i) What is meant by stability of a nucleus?

ii) Explain the factors that determine the stability of a nucleus.

Number
Of Neutrons
160 B

140 A

120 X Y

100

80

60

40

20

0
20 40 60 80 100 Number of protons

b (i) State what lines A and B represent.

(ii) Describe briefly how nuclide X and Y can gain stability.

QN: JJEB 2012

1. a) Explain what is meant by the term “half life” of the radioactive atom.
b) Write equations for the following nuclear reaction
30
i) Positive decay of phosphorous P
15
37
ii) Alpha bombardment of aluminum, Al
13
231
iii) Beta decay of Thorium Th
90
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 a) A graph of Neutron number against proton number is shown below

Neutron Stability belt

Number
Stability line

20 82 proton number

State how nuclides in region X, Y and Z attain nucleus stability.

7th
b) The activity of a radioactive reduced by 8 after 42 days. Calculate the half life of the
radio isotope
USES OF RADIOACTIVE ISOTOPES

1. Destroying cancer cells (60 Co) source is used to radiate cancer patients.

2. Sterilizing surgical instruments (more effective than boiling).

3. Detect leakage in underground water and fuel pipes. Short lived radioactive isotopes are
introduced into the pipe and the level of radioactivity on the surface is monitored.
4. Carbon – 14 dating can be used to calculate the age of plants and animal remains. The
formed 14 C combines with O2 to leave radioactive CO2 in the air which is absorbed in
green plants during photosynthesis.
The radioactive carbon is then incorporated into the plant tissue and also into the animal
tissue since most animals feed on plant materials.
The activity of Carbon – 14 in the living plant/ animal is determined as No and compared
with the activity of Carbon – 14 in the dead material as Nt , which is less than No hence
No
from 2.303log Nt =kt, the age of a dead material can be calculated given t 1 is ≈ 5700
2
years.
5. Used in tracer studies to trace the path of an element through the body e.g. radioactive
iodine is administered to patients with defective thyroids to enable doctors follow the
path of iodine through the body and since the half life of iodine is 8 days, the
radioactivity soon falls to low levels.
17
6. Radioactive oxygen, O can be used in understanding reaction mechanism of both
8
organic and inorganic ions. E.g. the reaction between ethanoic acid and ethanol can be
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 studied, when ethanol containing Oxygen – 17, the water formed as a product of the
above reaction also contains Oxygen – 17, implying that the O2 in the water comes from
ethanol and not ethanoic acid.
C2H5 17OH + CH3CO2H → CH3C – OCH2CH3 + H2O17
7. In agriculture metabolism of different substances e.g. phosphorus is monitored by
radioactive phosphorus i.e. a plant is made to take radioactive phosphorous and its
movement within the plant monitored to find out where metabolism takes place.
8. Radioisotopes are also used as tracers to trace the routes of chemicals and physiological
reactions such as photosynthesis.

DANGERS OF RADIOACTIVE RADIATIONS

1. Affects living cells and this may lead to death immediately.

2.
3. Biological effects on the human body are genetic which appear within an individual for
lifetime e.g. skin damage, liver damage, reduced/fertility, cancer and eye cataracts.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

 Wear protective gloves, boots and coats when dealing with radioactive substances
 Radioactive source should be held with a pair of tongs and it is advisable not to
look at it directly.
 When intensity is high, the users should put on protective badges with monitory
gadgets.

Assignment.

Differentiate between nuclear and chemical reactions (6mks)

ELECTRONIC STRUCTURE OF AN ATOM

Atomic structure emission

 When an atom of an element is subjected to heat/electrical discharge, electromagnetic

radiations are emitted.

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
  This means that the atom of the element absorbs energy and emits it inform of
electromagnetic radiation.
 When those radiations are passed through a spectrometer, a spectrum consisting of a
number of definite lines is obtained.
 Each line consists of a fixed frequency / wavelength of the radiation and the visible parts
of `the spectrum consists of a series of lines of different colors obtained.
The fact that it is a line spectrum and not a continuous spectrum reveals that only certain
energy absorptions and emissions are possible and hence evidence of existence of definite
electronic levels. Each absorption is due to movement of an electron from one energy
level to a higher energy level and when the electron goes back to the lower energy level,
energy is emitted inform of electromagnetic radiations which has a definite energy draw.

Energy and frequency

Energy and frequency of radiation which can be absorbed or emitted by an electron is
known as a quantum of energy
Energy and frequency of radiation can be related by the Planck‟s equation
C
∆E = hυ; υ = λ Where h is Planck‟s constant (6.6 × 10 −34Js)
υ = frequency (Hz)
C = velocity of light (3× 108ms−1)
⋏ = wavelength of radiation (m)

HYDROGEN SPECTRUM

 Each element has its characteristics pattern of lines in its atom and hence its own line
spectrum.
 Because hydrogen has only one electron per atom, it has the simplest line spectrum.
 The possible electronic energy levels are denoted by increasing values of n/principle
quantum numbers, whereby the lowest energy level (ground state) is described by n =1.
 Emission spectrum of hydrogen consists separate sets of lines or series in ultraviolet,
visible , and infra red regions of electromagnetic spectrum.
 Each series is produced by dropping off the electron to a particular energy level from all
other energy levels above it i.e Lyman series(ultra violet), formed by dropping levels to
energy level n = 1; Balmer series(visible), formed by dropping electrons from higher
energy level to energy level n = 2; Paschen series(infra red), formed by dropping electrons
from higher energy levels to energy level n = 3; brackett series(infra red), formed by
dropping electrons from higher energy levels to energy level n = 4, P – fund series (infra
red) formed by dropping electrons from higher energy levels to energy level n = 5.
Assignment one;
. a) Describe the spectrum of hydrogen atom. Use diagram to illustrate your answer.
b) Explain how the spectrum of a hydrogen atom
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 (i) is formed
(ii) Provides evidence for existence of energy levels ( 2001, p2)

CONVERGENCE SERIES AND IONISATION ENERGY

a) The convergence series

The interval between successive lines in each series gradually becomes smaller as the
frequency increase indicating that higher energy levels in the atoms become closer and closer to
one another until they finally merge/ converge to form a continuum of light (continuous band of
radiation)
b) Ionization energy
The energy required to remove an electron completely from an atom. If sufficient energy is
given to an atom to excite an electron, that electron will escape and the atom will become a
positive ion. i.e. ionization has taken place.

Calculation of ionization energy of Hydrogen atom

The ionization energy of a hydrogen atom can be calculated from its convergence frequency by using
Lyman series of lines i.e. convergence frequency for the Lyman series correspond to the ionisation
energy, for Hydrogen, the convergence frequency is 32.7 × 1014Hz.

Using Planck‟s equation;

I.E = hν, but h = 4 × 10 -13 KJmol-1

I.E = 4 × 10 −13 × 32.7 × 1014 = 1308KJmol-1

Energy difference between two energy levels

The total energy given by an electron in a given energy level is inversely proportional to the square of that
principle quantum number, n i.e.
1
E ∝ n2

For a given atom, the energy possessed by an electron at a given orbit/ energy level is given by;
𝟏
E = hC𝐑 𝐇 𝐧𝟐
Where h = Planck‟s constant, C = velocity of light, RH = Rydberg‟s constant.

Example: Find the energy of an electron at n = 4, for a hydrogen atom. Given;

n = 4, n2 = 16

Solution:

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 1
E = hCR H n2

1
= 6.6 × 10 -34 × 3 × 108 × 10967800 × 16 = 1.357 × 10 -19 Jmol-1

When an electron moves from one energy level to another, the energy change will be given by

∆E = Ei – Ef

Where Ei = initial energy

Ef = final energy
1
For n = i, Ei = hCR H ni 2
_____________________ (i)

1
For n = f, Ef = hCR H ______________________ (ii)
nf 2

⟹ ∆E = Ei – Ef

𝟏 𝟏
∆E = hC𝐑 𝐇 −
𝐧𝐢𝟐 𝐧𝐟 𝟐

N.B The value of ∆E is positive, when an electron is moving away from the nucleus towards a
higher energy level but it will have a negative value for an electron moving towards the nucleus.

Assignment two;

1. (a) Calculate the energy released when an electron drops from an energy level n = 5 to an
energy level n = 2 in a hydrogen spectrum.
(b) Determine the λ of the photon radiated in this transition.

c) The frequency of hydrogen at the point of ionization is 32.8 × 10 14 Hz. Calculate the
ionisation energy of hydrogen (h = 6.6 × 10 – 34 Js) UNEB 2001 (P2)

2. The sun largely consists of a mixture of hydrogen and helium, presence of each being
detected by spectroscopy. The line emission spectrum of atomic hydrogen in the ultra violet
region of electromagnetic spectrum is shown below.

frequency

a) Explain why this spectrum consists of lines which are converging.

b) Explain how the ionization energy of atomic hydrogen can be calculated from this spectrum.

Solution

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 a) Lines occur because the atoms have fixed energy levels; and transitions between the
upper and lower energy levels; cause emission of light;
Lines in the ultra violet region end on the energy level with n =1; this forms the Lyman‟s
series, the energy levels get close together as the energy/ frequency increases, so the lines
converge.
b) The convergence limit, where the lines merge, corresponds to an electron at the edge of
the atom; the ionization energy is the energy corresponding to that frequency. i.e. E = hf
where f is convergence frequency.

BOHR’S MODEL OF AN ATOM

It was based on Planck‟s quantum theory, according to which “energy can be absorbed/ emiited
in certain amounts like separate packets of energy called quantum.

Bohr postulated that;

 An electron moving in orbit can have only certain amounts of energy not an infinite
number of values, its energy is quantized.
 The energy that an electron needs in order to move in a particular orbit depends on the
radius of the orbit i.e. electrons in distant orbits from the nucleus require higher energy
than those in orbits near the nucleus.
 If the energy of the electron is quantized, the radius of the orbit must also be quantized
i.e. There is a restricted number of orbits with certain radii, not an infinite number of
orbit.
 To change from one orbit to another, the electron must absorb or emit a quantity of
energy exactly equal to the difference of the energy between the two orbits.

Assignment three

1.Explain what is meant by the following terms

a) Quantized
b) Principle quantum number
c) Line spectrum
d) Convergence limit

2.Why do atoms of elements emit discontinuous or line spectrum and not continuous?

COLLIGATIVE PROPERTIES OF SOLUTIONS

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
A colligative property is that physical property which depends only upon the number of non -
volatile solute particles present in the dilute solution and not on the chemical nature of these
particles.

Examples include;

 Vapor pressure lowering of the solvent

 Boiling point elevation of the solution.
 Freezing point depression of the solution.
 Osmosis and osmotic pressure of solution.

Assumptions/ limitations of colligative properties

A solution will only exhibit the exact value of a colligative property under the following
conditions;

 solute presents should not undergo any association or dissociation.

Association of solute particles decreases the number of particles lowering the
colligative property. Dissociation of solute particles increases the number of
particles and the value of colligative property becomes higher.
 There should be no chemical reaction between the solute and the solvent.
 The solutions are assumed to be dilute and ideal. i.e. interaction between the
solute particles are negligibly small.
 In case of lowering of vapour pressure and elevation of boiling point, the solute
must be non – volatile so that only the solvent particles can exert vapour pressure
above the solution (vaporize).

COLLIGATIVE PROPERTIES AND DETERMINATION OF RELATIVE

MOLECULAR MASSES OF DISSOLVED NON-VOLATILE SUBSTANCES.

VAPOUR PRESSURE LOWERING OF A SOLVENT

The vapour pressure of a liquid at a given temperature is the pressure exerted by the vapour
when it is in equilibrium with the liquid.

Addition of a non – volatile solute lowers the vapour pressure of the solution over that of the
pure solvent.

Explanation:

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
  Presence of the non- volatile solutes at the surface of the solution reduces the escaping
tendency of the otherwise volatile solvent molecules.

Solvent solution

Solvent molecules solvent and solute

at the surface molecules at the
surface of solution

 Presence of fewer solvent molecules at the surface of the solution than at the surface of
the solvent, few solvent molecules escape into vapour state exerting a small vapour
pressure on the solution.
 The lowering of vapour pressure of a solvent is based on Raoult’s law which states that,
“ the relative lowering of the vapour pressure of a solvent is equal to the mole fraction
of the non- volatile solute dissolved in that solvent at a given temperature”.

Consider a solution containing some non-volatile solute, let X1 and X2 be the mole fractions of
the solvent and the solute respectively.

If PO is the vapour pressure of the pure solvent and P is the vapour pressure of the solvent above
the solution, then according to;

Vapour pressure of solvent=vapour pressure of pure solvent× mole fraction of solvent.

P = PO X1

Addition of a non – volatile solute lowers the Vapour pressure of the solvent,

Decrease in Vapour Pressure, ∆P = P O – (PO∙ X1), ⟹ ∆P = PO (1−X1 ) ___________ (i)

But X1 + X2 = 1

X 2 = 1 - X1

Substituting in (i) ∆P = X2 ∙ P O
∆P
PO
= X2 (Raoult’s law) Where P∆PO = Relative lowering of vapour pressure

P O −P
= x2
PO

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 n2
Mole fraction of solute X2 = where n2 = mole fraction of solute and n1 = mole fraction of
n1 + n2
solvent

But for dilute solution n2 <<<< n1

⟹ n1 + n2 = 1

P O −P n2
⟹ =
PO n1

mass of substance
Number of moles = RMM of substance

If m1 is the mass of the solvent of RMM, M1 and m2 is the mass of solute of RMM , M2
m2
P O −P
Then = M2 m1
PO
M1

P O −P m2 ∙M1
⟹ =
PO M2∙m1

P O −P mass of solute ×RMM of solvent

⟹ = RMM
PO of solute ×mass of solvent

Examples:

1. Calculate the expected Vapour pressure at 25OC for a solution prepared by dissolving 158g
of a common table sugar, sucrose of molar mass 342.3g in 643.5cm3 of water at 25OC
(Density of water = 0.9971gcm-3), Vapour pressure of water = 23.76Pa)
Solution:
Vapour pressure of pure H20,(P O ) = 23.76 Pa
Molar mass of solute = 342.3g
Mass of solute = 158g
RMM of water = 18
Mass of water = Density × Volume
= 0.9971 × 643.5
= 641.63385
∆P mass of solute ×RMM of solvent
Using P O = RMM of solute ×mass of sol vent
158 ×18
= 342.3 ×641.63385
∆P = 0.3077Pa
∆P = P O – P
= 23.76 – 0.3077
= 23.4523
V.P of solution ≈ 23.45Pa
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
2. At 290K, the VP of water is 3.16 × 103Pa. calculate the lowering in VP which results when
6g of Urea are dissolved in 1000g of water at the same temperature given that the molecular
mass of Urea is 60g.
Solution:

VP of water = 3.16 × 103 Pa

Mass of solute = 6g
Mass of solvent = 1000g
Molecular mass of solute = 60g
RMM of water = 18g
P O −P mass of solute ×RMM of solvent
From Raoults law; = RMM
PO of solute ×mass of solvent
∆P 6 ×18
=
3.16 × 10 3 60 ×1000
∆P = 5.688Pa
3. The Vapour pressure of CS2 at a certain temperature is 53,330Pa, at the same temperature, a
solution of 5g of sulphur in 63cm3 of Carbon disulphide has a VP of 52340 Pa. the density of
CS2 at this temperature is 1.27gcm-3. Calculate:
a) R.F.M of sulphur
b) Molecular formula of sulphur in CS2 (C = 12, S = 32)

SOLUTION

a) Vapour Pressure of solute = 53330Pa (CS2)

Mass of solute = 5g
Volume of solvent = 63cm3
Vapour pressure of solvent = 52340 Pa
Density of solvent = 1.27gcm−3
Mass of solvent = Density × volume
= 1.27 × 63
= 80.01g

From Raoults law;

P O ×mass of solute ×RMM of solvent
RMM = (P O –P) ×mass of solvent
53330 ×5 ×76
=
80.01 ×(53330 −52540 )
= 255.844g ≈ 256g
b) Mass of one atom of sulphur = 32
256
Number of atoms = =8
32
⟹ 𝐒𝟖

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 S S S

S S S

S S
Assignment
1. A solution of 100g of solute in 1dm3 of water has a Vapour pressure of 2.27 × 10 -3 Nm-
2
at 20OC.The vapour pressure of water at 20OC is 2.34 × 10-3Nm-2. Calculate the
molecular mass of the solute.

2. The vapour pressure of Benzene is 9.97 × 103 at 20OC. what is the VP of the solution of
12.8g of naphthalene, C10H8 in 100g of Benzene.

BOILING POINT ELEVATION OF SOLUTION (EBULLIOSCOPY)

Boiling point of a liquid is the temperature at which the liquid’s vapour pressure becomes
equal to the external atmospheric pressure.

Dissolving a non-volatile solute in a solvent increases/ elevates the boiling point of the
solution. The difference between the boiling point of the solution and the boiling point of the
solvent is called the boiling point elevation of the solution.
Explanation;

 The molecule of the non-volatile solute at the surface of the solution reduces the escaping
tendency of the volatile solvent molecules into vapour state.
 Hence, the few solvent molecules in the vapour state would only exert a low Vapour
pressure onto the solution.
 Thus, this solution has to be heated to a much higher temperature in order for its vapour
pressure to be equal to the atmospheric pressure for boiling to occur.

Variation of vapour pressure with temperature.

Solvent soln 1 soln2

PO X Z W

Vapour
Pressure
P1 A Y

P2 B K

C Temperature (OC)
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
Curves;

i. AX;
Shows the variation of the Vapour Pressure of a pure solvent with temperature
ii. BZ:
Shows the variation of vapour pressure of solution 1 with temperature.
iii. CW;
Shows the variation of vapour pressure of solution 2 with temperature.
iv. To ;
Boiling point of pure solvent
v. T1
Boiling point of solution 1
vi. T2 ;
Boiling point of solution 2
For dilute solutions, the vapour pressure curves are nearly parallel to that of a pure
solvent and the curves therefore approximate to straight lines AX, BZ and CW. Therefore
triangle XYZ is similar to triangle XWK.
From geometry;
XZ XY
= XK
XW

But XZ = ∆T1 (T1 – To, for solution 1)

XW = ∆T2 (T2 – To, for solution 2)

XY = ∆P1 (PO – P1, For solution 1)

XK = ∆P2 (PO – P2 , for solution 2)

∆T1 P0− P ∆ P1
Therefore ∆T2 = P 0 – P 1 =
2 ∆P 2

Dividing the numerator and the denominator of the right hand side by PO
∆P1
∆T1 PO
= ∆P O
∆T2
PO

From the above expression, boiling point elevation of a solution is directly proportional to the
relative lowering of vapour pressure in dilute solution i.e.
∆P
∆Tb ∝ P O ___________________ (i)

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 ∆P
But from Raoult‟s law; = XB , mole fraction of the solute.
po

From (i), ∆Tb ∝ XB

∆Tb = k XB Where k = constant of proportionality.

nB
Also XB = n Where nB = Number of moles of solute and nA = number of moles of solvent.
A + nB

In dilute solution; nB <<<< nA

mB
nB
⟹ XB = = MB mA
nA
MA

mB MA
= × WheremB = Mass of solute
MB mA
mA = mass of solvent
MA = RMM of solvent
MB = RMM of solute
K.m B .M A
∴ ∆TB = M B .m A

Since MA (RMM of solvent) is constant for a particular solvent, both k and MA = Kb; where Kb
= boiling point elevation constant or ebullioscope constant.
𝐊𝐛 𝐦𝐁
⟹ ∆Tb = 𝐌 ___________ (ii)
𝐁 𝐦𝐀
If 1 mole of solute is dissolved in 1000g of the solvent the constant is called molal boiling point
elevation constant.
𝐦 𝟏𝟎𝟎𝟎
Expression (ii) becomes ∆Tb = kb . 𝐌𝐁 × 𝐦𝐀
𝐁
MOLAL BOILING POINT ELEVATION CONSTANT (EBULLOISCOPE CONSTANT)

Is the amount by which the boiling point of 1000g of a solvent is raised by dissolving one mole
of a non ionizing and non volatile solute.

Determination of R.M.M by boiling point elevation method. (Using Cottrell’s method)

Apparatus:

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
Procedure:

 A known mass of a solvent, Xg is put in a tube and heated.

 The boiling point of the pure solvent is measured and recorded as T1OC when the temperature
is constant.
 A known mass of solute Yg is introduced through the side arm.
 The solution is heated and its constant boiling temperature, T2oC is recorded

Results:

 Let the boiling point elevation constant be Kb

 Let the elevation in boiling point be ∆Tb (T2 – T1)OC
 Mass of solute = Yg
 Mass of solvent = Xg
 Let the R.M.M of the solute be M.

Treatment of results

Xg of solvent dissolves Yg of solute

y
1000g of solvent dissolves ( x × 1000)g of solute.

y
∆Tb is the elevation in boiling point caused by ( x × 1000)g of solute

1000 y
⟹ Kb is the elevation in boiling point caused by × Kb
X ∆Tb

1000y
Relative molecular mass of solute = × Kb
X . ∆Tb

Example

1. 5.5g of a non- volatile substance B was dissolved in 125g of a solvent. The vapour pressure
curves for the solution and pure solvent at constant pressure, P are shown below.

Pressure p X Y
(mmHg)

100 100.139 Temperature(℃

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 a) Identify the curve for the solution.
b) Calculate the molecular mass of B, (Boiling point elevation constant for the solvent, Kb =
0.52OCmol-1 kg-1)
c) State two limitations of your calculation in b)

Solution

a) Curve Y
b) Mass of solute = 5.5g
Mass of solvent = 125g
Kb = 0.52
Boiling point elevation, ∆T = (100.139 – 100) = 0.139OC

125g of solvent dissolves 5.5g of solute

5.5 ×1000
1000g of solvent dissolves ( )g of solute
125

= 44g of solute
44 ×0.52
0.139OC boiling point elevation is caused by ( ) g of solute
0.139

= 164.6g

Molecular mass of solute = 164.6g

c) – the solute particles should not associate or dissociate

 There should be no reaction between solute and solvent
 The solution is assumed to be dilute
 The solute should be non volatile.
2. A solution contains 50g of ethane – 1,2 – diol and 40g of water.
a) Calculate the boiling point of the solution (C = 12, O = 16, H = 1, Kb of water =
0.5Kmol-1kg-1)
b) State any assumption gas made in the calculation.
Soln:

Let the boiling point of elevation of the solution be ∆Tb

Molecular mass of the diol, C2H6O2 = 62g
Mass of solute = 50g
Mass of water = 0.5Kmol-1kg-1
40g of water dissolves 50g of diol

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 250 ×1000
1000g of water dissolves ( ) g of diol
40

= 1250g of diol
∆Tb is caused by 1250g of diol
0.52 is caused by 62g of diol
1250 ×0.52
∆Tb = ( )K
62
= 10.48K

NB: Boiling point of water = 100OC

⟹ Boiling point of solution = 373 + 10.48

= 383.48K

3. The addition of 2.01g of glucose to 25g of Benzene caused the boiling point
elevation of 1.204OC, while the boiling point caused by 2.04g of X in 20g of Benzene
was 2.413OC. Calculate

a) Kb for Benzene
b) RMM of X

Solution

a) Elevation in boiling point caused by glucose = 1.204OC

Mass of Benzene = 25g
Mass of glucose = 25g
RMM of glucose, C6H12O6 = (6× 12) + (1 × 12) + (16 × 6)
= 180
25g of Benzene dissolves 2.01g of glucose
2.01 ×1000
1000g of Benzene will dissolve ( ) g of glucose
25
= 80.4g of glucose
O
1.204 C elevation in boiling point caused by 80.4g of glucose
180 ×1.204
Kb = ( ) = 2.6955OC mol-1kg-1
80.4
b) Elevation in boiling point caused by X = 2.415OC
Mass of Benzene = 20g
Mass of X is 2.04g
20g of Benzene dissolves 2.04g of X
2.04 ×1000
1000g of Benzene will dissolve ( ) g of X
20
= 102g.
O
2.413 C boiling point elevation is caused by 102g of X

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 102 x 2.695
⟹ 2.6955OC boiling point will be caused by ( )
2.413
= 113.94g
≈ 114g
RMM of X = 114

UNEB 2003 (2)

a) State what is meant by the term boiling point constant of a liquid.

b) Describe an experiment that can be used to determine the R.M.M of a compound using
the method of elevation of the boiling point of a liquid.
c) Explain why the method you described in b is not used for the determination of R.M.M of
ethanoic acid in aqueous solution.
d) A solution of 2.8g of Cadmium (II) iodide in 20g of water boils at 100.2OC at a normal
pressure. Calculate the RMM of Cadmium (II) iodide (the boiling point elevation
constant for water = 0.52OCmol-1 kg-1)

Activity

1. A solution of 5g of X in 100g of water boiled at 100.42OC.Calculate the RMM of X (Kb

of water =0.52OCmol-1 kg-1)
2. The boiling point of ethanol is 78OC. Calculate the boiling point of solution containing
2.7g of ethanamide (CH3CONH2) in 75g of ethanol (Kb of ethanol = 1.15Kmol-1kg-1, C=
12, O = 16, N = 14, H = 1)
3. A solution of 2.8g Cadmium (II) Oxide in 20g of water boils at 100.2OC. Calculate the
RMM of Cadmium (II) Oxide. (Kb of water =0.52OCmol-11000 g-1)
4. When 0.72g of solute P was in 80g of water, the boiling point of the solution was
100.16OC. Calculate the molecular mass of the solute. (Kb of water =0.52OCmol-1 kg-1)
FREEZING POINT DEPRESSION OF SOLUTIONS ( CRYOSCOPY)
 Freezing point of a solution is the temperature at which the precipitation of the solid
solvent begins (solid solvent crystals begin to separate out of the solution)
At this temperature;
 the solid solvent is in equilibrium with the solution ,
 both will have the same Vapour pressure.

Dissolving a non-volatile solute in a solvent decreases/ depresses the freezing point of the
solution. The difference between the freezing point of the solution and the freezing point of
the solvent is called the freezing point depression of the solution.
Explanation;

 The molecule of the non-volatile solute at the surface of the solution reduces the escaping
tendency of the volatile solvent molecules into vapour state.

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
  Hence, the few solvent molecules in the vapour state would only exert a low Vapour
pressure onto the solution.
 Vapour pressure of the solution is therefore lower than that of the pure solvent; and so the
vapour pressure of the solution will equal that of the solid solvent at a lower temperature
than that of pure solvent; a lower freezing point.

Variation of Vapour Pressure of solvent and solution with temperature.

Vapour Solid solvent C E

Vapour pressure solution 1 G

P0 B

P1 D H Solution 2

P2 F I

T2 T1 T0
Temperature (OC)

Curves :

i. AB : - Sublimation curve of solid solvent

 Solid solvent is in equilibrium with its vapour.
ii. BC: Vapour Pressure curve of pure liquid solvent.
 Liquid solvent is in equilibrium with its vapour.
iii. DE: VP curve of solution 1 along which the solution is in equilibrium with its vapour.
iv. FG: VP curve of solution 2

Points

i. B: →Curve AB and BC intersect.

ii. TO → Freezing point of the pure solvent
iii. T1 → Freezing point of solution 1
iv. T2 freezing point of solution 2
v. D → Curve DE intersects the sublimation curve
 Both T1 and T2 are lower than To

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
  If PO is the Vapour pressure of the solid and the liquid solvent at temperature To, and
P1 and P2 are the Vapour pressures of solution 1 and 2 respectively at the same
temperature.
 For dilute solutions, F, D, and B are close to each other and therefore DH and FI
approximate to straight lines. → ∆BDH and FBI are similar.

From Geometry
BH DH
= _____________________ (i)
BI FI
But BH = (PO – P1) = ∆P1 (Lowering of VP of solution 1)
BI = (PO – P2) = ∆P2 (Lowering of VP of solution 2)
DH = (TO – T1) = ∆Tf 1 (freezing point of depression of solution 1)
EI = (TO – T2) = ∆Tf 2 (Freezing point depression of solution 2)

Equation (i) becomes

∆P1 ∆Tf 1
= ∆Tf 2 ____________________________ (ii)
∆P2

∆Tf 1
= ∆P1 ∆P2
∆Tf 2

Dividing the numerator and the denominator of the right hand side of the equation by PO
∆P1
∆Tf 1 PO
⟹ = ∆P 2
∆Tf 2
P0

∆P
Or ∆Tf ∝ P O _____________________________________ (iii)

∆P
But from Raoullt’s law; ∝ XB
PO

∆P
= kXB
PO

∆Tf = kXB
∩B
XB = where ∩B = Number of moles of solute.
∩A + ∩B

∩A = Number of moles of solvent

For dilute solutions; ∩B ≪≪≪≪ ∩A

∴ ∩B + ∩A ≈ ∩A

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 ∩ k∩B
XB = ∩B ⟹ ∆Tf =
A ∩A

mass
BUT number of moles = molecular mASS

mB
Mb
⟹ ∆Tf = k mA
MA

k mBM A
∆Tf = MBm A

Where MA = Molecular mass of solvent

MB = Molecular mass of solute
mA = mass of solvent
mB = mass of solute
For a given solvent, RMM of a solvent (MA) is constant, therefore both k and MA are
replaced by another constant kf in equation
𝐤𝐟 𝐦𝐁𝐌𝐀
∆Tf = 𝐌𝐁𝐦𝐀

For a molar solution of 1 mole of solute in 1000g of solvent.

𝐤𝐟 𝐦𝐁.𝟏𝟎𝟎𝟎
∆Tf = where kf = molal freezing point depression constant / cryoscopic constant
𝐌𝐁𝐦𝐀

Molal freezing point lowering constant/cryoscopic constant(Kf)

Is the amount by which the freezing point of 1000g of solvent is lowered by

dissolving 1 mole of solute in it.

Determination of depression by cooling curves of the solvent and solution

 A known mass of the solvent is placed in the inner glass tube; it is then placed in a
freezing mixture.
 Solvent is then stirred continuously; its temperature recorded after known intervals of
time until solidification occurs.
 Glass tube then removed and solid solvent melted by warming the glass tube.
 Solute of known mass, is then introduced in the solvent, stirred to dissolve it and whole
set up then placed back in the freezing mixture.
 The temperature of the solution is recorded at the same intervals of time until crystals
appear.

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 Graph of variation of temperature with time are then plotted as below.
Temp (OC) A

Solvent

solution

To C D

B ∆Tf

T1 E

Time (s)

POINTS

 B and E represents super cooling

 CD – Temperature remains constant until all the solvent solidify.

NB: Super cooling is the cooling below the actual freezing point of a liquid resulting from the
loss of latent heat of fusion as crystallization starts.

DETERMINATION OF RMM OF ASUBSTANCE BY CRYOSCOPY

Set up;

procedure

 A known mass, W2 g of solvent is put in a glass tube containing the Beckmann‟s

thermometer and a stirrer.

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
  The tube is inserted in the empty vessel which provides an air jacket so as to prevent
rapid cooling of the contents of the freezing tube.
 The whole apparatus is then placed in the outer vessel containing the freezing mixture
and allowed to cool. As it is cooling, the solvent is constantly stirred in order to avoid
super cooling.
 The constant temperature, TO OC when the solvent has just solidified is recorded using
the Beckmann‟s thermometer.
 The tube containing the solidified solvent is removed and warmed to melt the solvent.
 A known mass of solute, W1g whose MM is under investigation is added into the molten
solvent through the side arm.
 The tube is then placed back in the air jacket within the freezing mixture with constant
stirring.
 The freezing point, T2 OC of the solution is determined and recorded.

Results

Mass of pure solvent = W2g

Mass of solute = W 1g
Freezing point of pure solvent = T0OC
Freezing point of solution = T1OC
Freezing point constant = Kf
Freezing point depression = (TO – T1)O C = ∆Tf
Molecular mass of substance = Mr.
Treatment of results:
W2g of solvent dissolves W1g of solute
W 1 X 1000
1000g of solvent dissolves ( ) g of solute
W2
w 1 X 1000
g of solute causes a depression of ∆Tf
w2
RMM of solute causes a depression of kf
k f X W 1 ×1000
RMM of solute = W 2 × ∆T f

NOTE: Determination of the RMM of a substance by depression of the boiling point is better
than by the elevation of boiling point because there is less tendency of the solute
decomposing.
Examples
1. 1.5g of a compound Q of molecular mass 90g on dissolving in 30g of water producing a
freezing point at – 1.04OC.Calculate the freezing point constant of water.
Solution:

Mass of solute = 1.5g

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 Mass of solvent = 30g
Freezing point of solution = – 1.04OC
Freezing point of water = 0OC
Freezing point depression = (0 − − 1.04) OC
∆Tf = 1.04OC
30g of water dissolves 1.5g of Q
1.5 ×1000
1000g of water will dissolve ( 30 ) g of Q
= 50g of Q
O
1.04 C depression in freezing is caused by 50g of Q
Kf is caused by 90g of Q
90 ×1.04 O
⟹ Kf = C mol−1kg -1
30

= 1.872OCmol-1kg -1

2. Calculate the freezing point of solution of 28g of ethanamide (CH3CONH2) in 500g of water.
The cryoscopic constant of 100g of water is 18.6OC mol−1kg-1 ( C =12, O = 16, H =1, N =14)
Solution

1 mole of solute in 10g of water causes 18.6OC depression

18.6 ×100
1 mole of solute in 1000g of water will cause depression
1000
= 1.86OC
Mass of solute = 28g
Molecular mass of ethanamide, CH3CONH2 = (12 + 3 + 12 + 16 + 14 +2) = 59g
Mass of solvent = 500g of water
500g of water dissolves 28g of solute.
28 ×1000
1000g of water will dissolve g of solute
500
= 56g of solute

59g of solute causes 1.86OC depression.

1.86 ×56 O
∴ 56g of solute causes C depression
59
∆Tf = 1.765OC.
Freezing point of solution = 0 − 1.765OC = −1.765OC

3. A solution 3.7g of sucrose (C12H22O11) in 100g of water freezes at – 0.204OC. If a solution

containing 27.3g/dm3 of W freezes at – 0.283OC.
Calculate;
a) The freezing point constant of water.
b) The relative molecular mass of W (C = 12, O = 16, H =1)

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
4. UNEB 2007 (10)

The cooling curves of a solution containing 1.2g of sulphur in 20.0g of carbon disulphide and
that of pure Carbon disulphide as shown below.

Temp (OC)

A X

B Y

Time (minutes)

a) i) Identify curves X and Y.

ii) State what is represented by points A and B.
b) i) Calculate the R.M.M of sulphur in Carbon disulphide. (the freezing point depression
constant for CS2 is 6.10 OC mol−1kg−1 and freezing point depression ofCS2 was 1.43OC)
ii) Comment on your answer.
iii) Deduce and draw the structure of Sulphur in Carbon disulphide

Assumptions/ Limitations of determining R.M.M by depression in

Freezing point and elevation in boiling point.

 solution must be dilute

 solute must be highly soluble in the solvent
 solute must be non – volatile
 solute not react with the solvent
 solute should not associate or dissociate.
 solute should not be with a very high R.M.M, because high RMM cause a very small
difference in temperature which can not be read off on a thermometer.
Questions
UNEB 2003 PAPER 1, No. 1
UNEB 2012 No. 1 PAPER 1

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
QUESTIONS:

1. a) i) State two advantages of using a mass spectrometer over the depression of freezing point
method of determining relative atomic masses.
ii) Describe how the molecular mass of a substance can be determined using freezing point
depression method (diagram not required) (7mks)
iii) Explain why the method you have described in (ii) is not suitable for determining the
molecular mass of a polymer.

b) Calculate the freezing point of solution containing 4.2g of ethane -1, 2 – diol (M.M = 62g)
in 30g of water. (kf of water = 1.86OC mol−1kg−1)

2. a) Define the term freezing point constant of a substance.

b) A solution containing 1.54g of naphthalene (C10H8) in 18g of camphor freezes at
O
148.3 C. Calculate the freezing point constant of camphor (The freezing point of
camphor is 175oC) UNEB 2003 PAPER 1

3. a) The vapour pressure of a solution containing 108.2g of a substance Y in 100g of water at

20OC was reduced by 0.186mmHg (The VP of water at 20OC is 17.54mmHg). Calculate
the RMM of substance Y.
b) State four assumptions made in (a).
c) Explain why the vapour pressure of a solution containing a non – volatile solute is less
than the VP of a pure solvent.

4. A solution containing Xg of cane sugar (RMM = 342) in 105g of water at a pressure of

101.3Pa boiled at 100.06OC. determine X (kb of water = 0.52OC mol−1kg−1) UNEB 1993:

OSMOSIS AND OSMOTIC PRESSURE

OSMOSIS
Is the movement of solvent molecules from a dilute solution to a more concentrated solution
through a semi – permeable membrane.
OSMOTIC PRESSURE (π)
Is a mechanical pressure which must be applied on a solution to prevent the passage of
solvent molecules into the solution through a semi – permeable membrane.
Solutions with the same osmotic pressure at the same temperature are said to be isotonic

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
DETERMINATION OF OSMOTIC PRESSURE OF THE SOLUTION(By Berkeley and
Hartley method)

Set up

Procedure:

 A solution whose Osmotic pressure is to be obtained is put in a steel vessel and separated
from the solvent (e.g. water) in a cylinder by a semi-permeable membrane.
 After sometime, the solvent molecules flow through the semi-permeable membrane to the
solution hence forcing the solvent levels in the capillary tube to fall slowly.
 The tendency of the solvent molecules to pass into the solution is balanced by pressing
the piston until when the solvent in the capillary tube is just at equilibrium i.e. when there
is no more solvent molecules passing through the membrane to the side of the solution.
 The pressure at this point is the osmotic pressure of the solution in the steel vessel which
is directly read off from the pressure gauge.
 The osmotic pressure is more accurately determined by taking the average readings on
the gauge when the levels are slowly rising and falling as is it difficult to adjust the
pressure to exactly attain the equilibrium for no movement on either sides.
NB: Reverse osmosis is the movement of water from the solution side to the solvent
through the semi-permeable membrane on application of too large pressure on the
solution side of the membrane.
Factors affecting Osmotic pressure/ Laws of Osmotic pressure.
i. Concentration
 The osmotic pressure of a dilute solution is directly proportional to the molar
concentration of the solution at a constant temperature.i.e.
π
Π ∝ concentration of solution (C), π = Kc ⟹ C = constant

1
But C ∝ V Where V is the volume of the solution containing one mole of solute.

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 k
⟹C=V

Substituting for C;
πV
= constant _________________________ (i)
k

ii. Temperature:
 The osmotic pressure of a dilute solution is directly proportional to the absolute
temperature of the solution. i.e.
I.e. π ∝ T
Π = kt
π
= Constant ________________________________ (ii)
T
 Combining the two equations we obtain;
𝛑𝐕 = 𝐧𝐑𝐓 for n moles of solute
 Equation 𝛑𝐕 = 𝐧𝐑𝐓 is called the Van’t Hoff equation and holds only for dilute
solutions.

Importance of Osmotic pressure

 Uptake of water by plants through roots and maintains turgidity in plants.

 Used in the determination of Relative molecular mass of polymers.
This is because high molecular mass solutes (polymers) produce a very small elevation
of boiling point/ depression of freezing point that cannot be easily measured.
 Used in many biological processes e.g. distribution of nutrients and release of
metabolic waste products.

Worked example;

1. Calculate the RMM of sucrose if a solution containing 19.15g of solution per dm3 has an
osmotic pressure of 136300Pa at 20OC.
Solution
Mass of solution = 19.15g
Volume = 1dm-3 = 10-3m3
Π = 136300Pa
T = 20OC = 293K
1dm3 contains 19.15g of solution
22.4dm3 contain (19.15 × 22.4)
= 428.96g
At 293K, the osmotic pressure is 136300Pa
136300 ×273
At 273K, the osmotic pressure is Pa
293
= 126996.2457Pa
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 126996.2457Pa is caused by 428.96g
428.96 × 101325
101325Pa is caused by 126996 .2457
= 342.249
≈ 342g
2. A solution containing 14g/l of polyvinyl Chloride polymer in 1 litre of dioxane was found to
have an osmotic pressure of 6 × 10−4 atmospheres at 27OC. Find the approximate molecular
weight of this polymer.
3. The Osmotic pressure of a solution containing 1.24% of a polymer is 3.1 × 10-3 atmospheres
of 25OC. Determine the RMM of the polymer.
Soln
1.24% = 1.24g in 100cm3 of solvent
Osmotic pressure = 3.1 × 10-3 atmospheres
Mass of polymer = 1.24g
Volume of solvent = 100cm3
Temperature = 25oC = 298K
100cm3 containing 1.24g of polymer
1.24 ×22400
22400cm3 will contain g of polymer
100
= 277.76g
At 298K, the osmotic pressure is 3.1 × 10-3 atmospheres
3.1 × 10−3 ×273
⟹ At 273K, the osmotic pressure will be atmospheres
298
= 2.83993 × 10-3 atmospheres

2.83993 × 10-3 atmospheres are caused by 277.76g

277.76 ×1
1 atmosphere will be caused by g
2.83993 × 10−3
= 97805.22g
∴ The RMM of the polymer is 97805.22

EFFECTS OF DISSOCIATION AND ASSOCIATION OF SOLUTES ON

COLLIGATIVE PROPERTY

a) Effect of Dissociation;
Dissociation is the breakdown of ionic compounds into free ions. E.g.
NaCl(s) ⟶ Na+ + Cl−
 Dissociation increases the number of particles in solution; and since
colligative property depends on the number of the non- volatile solutes,
the effect is that colligative property will increase.

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 
Colligative property is inversely proportional to relative molecular mass
of the non volatile solute, thus the experimental RMM of the non – volatile
solute will decrease.
Degree of dissociation ∝

Is the fraction of the original molecule which has undergone dissociation. For solute
which dissociates into n ions, the degree of dissociation, ∝ is given by
𝒊−1 observed /experimental colligative property
∝ = n−1 Where i = calculated /theoretical /expected colligativeproperty

Example:

When 2.150g of Ca (NO3)2 in 100g of water forms a solution that freezes at – 0.62OC.
Find the apparent degree of dissociation given that kf = 1.86OCmol-1kg -1
Solution

Observed Colligative property, freezing point depression = 0 − − 0.62=0.62℃

RMM of Ca (NO3)2 = 40 + 28 + 96 = 164
Mass of solute = 2.150g, mass of water (solvent) = 100g
2.15 ×1000
100g of water dissolves g of Ca (NO3)2
100

= 21.5g of Ca (NO3)2

164g of (Ca (NO3)2) causes a depression of 1.86OC

21.5g of Ca (NO3)2 cause a depression of ∆Tf
21.5 ×1.86
∆Tf = 164
Expected freezing point depression = 0.24OC
𝒊−1
Using ∝ = n−1

Ca (NO3)2 → Ca2+ + 2NO−3

∴ Number of moles (n) = 2 + 1 = 3
observed colligative property 0.62
i = expected = 0.24 = 2.5833
colligative property
2.5833 −1
∝= = 0.79 or 79%
3−1
The boiling point of pure water at 760mmHg is 100OC. At the same pressure, a solution of
0.29g of Sodium chloride in 11g of water boils at a temperature 0.443OC higher.
a) Calculate the boiling point of sodium chloride assuming it did not dissolve in water. (kb
of water = 0.52oCmol-1kg -1)
b) Use your answer in (a) above to calculate the apparent degree of dissociation of sodium
chloride in water.

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
b) Effects of Association (Dimerisation)

Association is the combining of smaller solute particles to form larger particles (dimer)
 It lowers the value of colligative property ; increasing the value of RMM of a non
volatile solute.
 The solute particles associate through intermolecular hydrogen bonding e.g. Carboxylic
acids always associate when dissolved in organic solvents like Benzene. i.e. for ethanoic
acid;
2CH3COOH → (CH3COOH)2

For a molecule A which associates, 2A A2

Initial number of moles 1 0
∝
Moles associated ∝ 2

∝
At equilibrium 2 (1 − ∝) 2
∝
(1 - ∝) 2
∝
Total number of moles 1−∝+
2

α
=1−2
But colligative property is proportional to the number of particles

𝐎𝐛𝐬𝐞𝐫𝐯𝐞𝐝 𝐜𝐨𝐥𝐥𝐢𝐠𝐚𝐭𝐢𝐯𝐞 𝐩𝐫𝐨𝐩𝐞𝐫𝐭𝐲 𝛂

=1−𝟐
𝐞𝐱𝐩𝐞𝐜𝐭𝐞𝐝 𝐜𝐨𝐥𝐥𝐢𝐠𝐚𝐭𝐢𝐯𝐞 𝐩𝐫𝐨𝐩𝐞𝐫𝐭𝐲

Example:
1. A solution of 3.78g of ethanoic acid in 75g of Benzene boiled at 1.14OC above the boiling
point of pure solvent.
i. Calculate RMM of this acid under this condition and give a comment on your answer.
ii. Find the degree of association of this acid given; (kb of Benzene is 2.53OCmol-1kg -1)
Solution
(i) Mass of solute = 3.78g
Mass of ethanoic acid (solute) = 75g
∆Tb = 1.14OC
Kb = 2.53OCmol -1kg -1
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 75g of solvent dissolves 3.78g of solute
3.78 ×1000
1000g of solvent dissolves g of solute
75
= 50.4g of solute
O
1.14 C elevation in boiling point is caused by 50.4g
50.4 ×2.53
2.53OC elevation in boiling point is caused by 1.14
= 111.85
= 112
Comment
112
= 1.86 ≈ 2 (CH3CO2H = 60)
60
The relative molecular mass is almost twice the true value of molecular mass of the
acid implying that the acid associated through intermolecular hydrogen bonding in
Benzene.
(ii) Observed boiling point elevation = 1.14OC
60g of CH3COOH cause an elevation of 2.53
2.53 ×50.4
50.4g of acid will cause 60
= 2.1252OC
⟹calculated /Expected colligative property = 2.1252OC
Observed Boiling point elevation α
=1−2
expected boiling point elevation
1.14 ∝
=1−2
2.125
1.14
∝=2 1− 2.125
∝ = 0.93 = 93%

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 BONDING AND STRUCTURE
 Atoms combine in order to acquire a stable noble gas structure.
 They do this by either transfer of electrons from one atom to another or by sharing electrons
contributed by each atom.
 Only electrons in the outermost shell/ valence shells are involved in bonding
TYPES OF BONDING
There are six types of bonding namely;
 Ionic/electrovalent/ Heteropolar bonding
 Covalent/ Homopolar bonding
 Dative/ Co-ordinate bond
 Metallic bonding
 Hydrogen bonding
 Van der waal‟s forces/bonds
a) IONIC BONDING
 An ionic bond is formed by complete transfer of electrons from one atom to another to
form oppositely charged ions held together by electrostatic forces of attraction.
 It is formed between a metal (electropositive) and a non metal (electronegative) e.g.
bonding between Na (11) and chlorine atom (17)
Na: 1S22S22P63S1
Cl: 1S22S22P63S23P5

The electron transferred from Sodium atom fits in the singly occupied orbital of the 3P of the
Chlorine atom i.e.
Sketch Px Py Pz
Before transfer ↿⇂ ↿⇂ ↿
After transfer
Px Py Pz
↿⇂ ↿⇂ ↿⇂

Other examples of compounds formed by electrovalent bonding include

 CaCl2, MgO, KI, NaH etc

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
Factors that affect formation of ions

i. Ionization energy:
The lower the ionization energy the most loosely held is an electron and the more
electropositive the element.
ii. Electron affinity:
Is the ease with which the atoms form anions/negatively charged ions. The greater the
value of electron affinity, the easier is negatively charged ion formed.

COVALENT CHARACTER IN IONIC BOND

The covalent character of the ionic bond depends on the;
 polarizing power of the positive ion
 polarisability of the negative ions.
a) Polarising power of cations
An ionic bond will acquire a degree of covalent character if the positive ion can attract
electrons from the negative ion back into the region between the two nuclei.
The covalent bond character arises because the electrons are partially shared. i.e.

 Polarizing power is the extent to which a positive ion can attract electrons from
negative ion back into the region between the nuclei.

Factors affecting polarizing power.

i. Charge on the cation:

The larger the positive charge on the ion, the greater the attraction of the valence
electrons.
ii. Size of the cation
The smaller the size of the cation, the closer it is to the valence electrons and the larger
the force it exerts on them.
iii. Charge density (charge : radius ratio)
The greater the charge density of the cation, the greater its polarizing power and therefore
the greater the covalent character of the bond it forms with the anion.

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 Consider the data below

Ions Na+ Mg2+ Al 3+

Ionic radius 0.095 0.065 0.05

Polarizing power 10.5 30.5 60

Z
(r)

Melting point of 801 712 180

anhydrous chloride

Interpretation

 Polarizing power of the cat ions increases in the order of Na+ < Mg2+ < Al 3+.
 Al 3+ having a high polarizing power exerts the strongest polarization in Aluminium (III )
chloride resulting in a high degree of Covalence in Aluminium chloride, giving aluminium
chloride the lowest melting point.
 Low polarizing power of Na+, sodium chloride remains essentially an ionic compound with a
very high melting point.

Questions:

1. Briefly explain why NaCl melts at 8000C where as AlCl3 sublimes at 180OC.
Solution
Both NaCl and AlCl3 have ionic bonding; but because of small size and large charge of
Al3+ ions; which gives it large polarizing power; the electron on the outermost shell of
the chloride ions are greatly displaced (polarised) towards the Al3+; such that aluminium
chloride, AlCl3 develops some covalent character; making it have low melting point just
like covalent compounds;
NaCl is purely ionic hence very high melting point.
b) Polarisability of the anions
The extent to which a positive ion can pull electrons back into the space between the
two nuclei depends not only on the polarizing power of the cat ion but also how
easily it is to polarize a negative ion.
The polarisability of a negative ion measures the ease with which its electron density
can be distorted.

Factors affecting polarisability:

i. Charge on the negative ion
Polarisability increases with increase in the charge on the anion.

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 This is because as the charge on the anion increases, the anion repels its outermost
electrons strongly and effectively.

ii. Size of the anion/number of electrons the anion has

Polarizability increases with increase in size of the anion / increase in the number of
electrons e.g.
 Fluoride ions have fewer electrons and ;
 are smaller than the chloride ions; giving it a lower polarisability than
chloride ions; decreasing its covalent character.
 All fluorides have greater ionic character than the corresponding chlorides.
 This explains why Aluminium fluoride is a crystalline solid melting above
10000C whereas Aluminium chloride shows covalent character.
Qn 1: i) Explain why aluminium fluoride AlF3 is ionic and Aluminium chloride is
covalent.
ii) Explain why the melting point of CaO is higher than that of CaCl2
Qn 2 The ionic radii of Sodium ions, Mg2+ and Al3+ are given in the table below

Ion Na+ Mg2+ Al3+

Ionic radius (nm) 0.095 0.065 0.050

a) Calculate the charge to radius ratio for

i. Na+
ii. Mg2+
iii. Al3+
b) Which of the ions has
i. Least polarizing power
ii. The greater polarizing power
c) Give a reason for your answer in (b) above.

PROPERTIES OF IONIC COMPOUNDS

 Are crystalline solids at room temperature.

 Have high melting and boiling points due to strong electrostatic attraction between the
oppositely charged ions.
 Soluble in water but are insoluble in organic solvents eg Benzene and ethoxy ethane
 Conduct electricity in their molten state and solution state due to the presence of free
ions.
 Oppositely charged ions react together in aqueous solution instantaneously/ rapidly.

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
b) COVALENT BONDING

 A Covalent bond is formed by sharing a pair of unpaired electrons between atoms, each
of which donates an electron to the bond.
 It‟s formed between atoms with either no electronegativity difference or a small
electronegativity difference e.g. in chlorine molecule and hydrogen chloride.
 Occurs in non – metals and results into the formation of molecules.

Illustration:
i. Hydrogen chloride

H +

BOND POLARITY IN COVALENT COMPOUNDS

The covalent bond which holds the two atoms together within the molecule contains a pair of
electrons shared between the two atoms.
When the two bonding atoms are not identical, the electrons will be unequally shared.
Unequal sharing of electrons is because different atoms have different power of attraction for
electron pairs i.e. have different electronegativity values.
NB: Electronegativity is the relative ability of an element to attract bonding electrons towards
itself.
When unequal sharing of electrons occur, it results in slight separation of charge whereby the
more electronegative atom acquires a partial negative charge (δ −) and the other positive charge
(δ+) .
Bond polarity is therefore the unequal sharing of electrons in a covalent bond leading to the
separation of charge.
The higher the electronegative difference between two bonding atoms, the greater the separation
of charge and hence the bond polarity.
Bond polarity in diatomic molecule results in the separation of charge over the whole molecule
and the molecule is thus said to be polar and the overall molecule has an electric dipole
(separated charges of opposite signs) quantified as the electric dipole moment, whose magnitude
depends on the magnitude of charge and distance separating the charge.
A molecule made up of more than 2 atoms and having polar bonds within itself may not
necessarily have an overall dipole moment, if the molecule is symmetrical.

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 Reasons:
Symmetrical distribution of atoms about the central atom, creates equal and opposite dipole
moment in all directions that cancel out making the molecule non polar e.g;

i. Carbon dioxide;
Resultant dipole moment = 0

ii. Tetrachloromethane, CCl4

Resultant dipole moment = 0

The lack of an overall dipole moment on the molecules makes the molecule non – polar and it is
an indicator for the symmetry within that molecule.

Unsymmetrical molecules like water, Ammonia and trichloromethane have an overall dipole
moment over the molecule and are said to be polar.

i. Trichloromethane

Cl Cl Cl
ii. Water

O 2δ-

𝛅+ 𝛅+
H H
This explains why trichloromethane is deflected by a charged rod while tetrachlomethane is
not, when liquid trichloromethane and tetrachloromethane are passed separately from the
beaker closer to the charged rods.

Example:
Explain why Boron trichloride, is a non – polar molecule while Nitrogen trichloride (NCl3) is
polar.
Soln:
Boron trichloride has a trigonal planar structure in which the chloride atoms are arranged
symmetrically around the central Boron atom.
Therefore because of this symmetry, the net dipole moments cancel out to zero.

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 Cl

Cl Cl
However Nitrogen trichloride has a trigonal pyramidal structure in which the chloride ions are
not symmetrically arranged.
Therefore there is a net dipole moment in the direction of the more electronegative chlorine atom
hence the trichloride is polar.

PROPERTIES OF COVALENT COMPOUNDS

 More soluble in organic solvents but insoluble in water.

 Do not conduct electricity due to absence of free ions in them except a few which form
ions when dissolved in water e.g. hydrogen chloride.
 Consists of discrete molecules and not ions.
 Mainly gases, liquids with very low melting points.

C.) DATIVE/ CO-ORDINATE BOND

Is a covalent bond whereby an electron rich atom in a molecule gets bonded to another atom/ ion
of a species which is electron deficient.

The donor atom donates the non bonding pair of electrons (lone pair) to the acceptor atom which
must be either a;

 positively charged species or

 must have an empty orbital.

Examples;

i. Formation of hydroxonium ions from water and acid.

H2O + H+ ⟶

ii. Formation of Ammonium ion from H+ and NH3

H H

H N: + H+ ⟶ H N⟶H

H H

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
iii. Existence of dimer of FeCl3 and AlCl3 in vapour state

iv. Formation of transition metal complexes; ligands (bonding atoms) donate their lone pairs
of electrons to empty d. orbital of transition metal ions. E.g.
Cu (NH3 )4 2+

H3N NH3

Cu

H3N NH3

v. Between Ammonia and Boron trichloride

H3N + BCl3 ⟶ H3N ⟶ BCl3
For BF3
H3N: ⟶ BF3

NB: Dative bond is;

 weaker than normal covalent bond.

 represented by an arrow which shows direction in which a lone pair of electron is
donated.

D.) METALLIC BONDING:

 A metal consists of identical atoms closely packed together.

 The outermost electrons are lost control of and uniformly delocalized over the whole
metal, ionizing the metal atoms.
 Metallic bonding therefore consists of attraction between the “sea” of mobile delocalized
electrons and the positively charged nucleus of metal atoms.
 These delocalized electrons are responsible for the conductivity of heat and electricity by
metals.
 Metals have high melting points, the melting points depending on the strength of the
bond that holds the atoms in a rigid structure.
 The strength of the metallic bond formed depends on the number of valence electrons
which each metal atom contributes to the cloud.
e.g.
i. Melting point of group II elements is higher than those of group I because they contribute
two electrons in forming the metallic bond.
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 ii. The melting points of transitional metals are higher than those of higher metals because
they use electrons from 4S and 3d to form strong metallic bonds.

E.) VAN DER WAAL’S FORCES:

Is the intermolecular force of attraction between two molecules. They include;

i. Dipole – Dipole interaction:

 Electrostatic attraction between the opposite ends of dipole amount for
intermolecular bonding in polar compounds.
 These polar molecules have partial charges due to the difference in their
electronegativity e.g in HCl and Propanone;

Hδ+ Clδ− − − − − − − Hδ+ Cl δ−

Van der waal‟s bond

H3C CH3

Cδ+ = Oδ− −−−−−−− Cδ+ = 0 δ−

CH3 CH3

Van der waal‟s bond

ii. Dipole – Induced dipole interaction:

 Consider two nonpolar molecules which are very close to each other.
 Since they are nonpolar the arrangement of electrons on average is symmetrical.
 However at any instant, the electron distribution in one molecule may be
unsymmetrical resulting into a dipole at a particular instant.
 This dipole may induce a dipole through a neighbouring molecule.
 Dipole formed is only a short time but the net attraction it produces is permanent.

Aδ+ − Bδ− C−P Aδ+ − Bδ− Cδ+ − P δ−

N.B.

High relative molecular mass molecules have high van der waal‟s forces of
attraction; because of increase in the number of electrons which are loosely bound
in a molecule.
Energy associated with vanderwaal‟s bond is small compared to the normal
covalent bond.

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 Evidence for the existence of Vander waal’s forces

 Increase in boiling and melting points of group VI elements down the group and
in alkane.
 Changing physical states of the halogens down the group i.e. in iodine because of
the big size of molecules the forces are strong enough to hold the Iodine
molecules in solid state while fluorine and chlorine the forces are weak and are
overcome at room temperature.
 Liquefaction of gases
 Non –ideal behavior of gases

F) HYDROGEN BONDING:

Is a permanent bond formed by dipole interaction/attraction between the hydrogen atom

bonded to an electronegative element e.g. oxygen, Nitrogen and fluorine and another
highly electronegative atom with at least a lone pair of electrons.

TYPES OF HYDROGEN BONDING

1. Intermolecular hydrogen bond:

Is a hydrogen bond formed between two/more similar or different molecules e.g.
a) Two similar carboxylic acid. E.g. Ethanoic acid.

O HO

H3C – C C – CH3
OH O

Intermolecular hydrogen day

b) Between two different molecules eg water and alcohol

ROH O−H

Intermolecular hydrogen bond

c) Two similar amines

CH3CH2N – H −−−−−−− N − CH2CH3

H H
d) Water molecules
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 Oδ −

Hδ+ Hδ− Oδ −

Hδ+ Hδ+
e) 4 – nitrophenol

O2N Oδ − − Hδ+

O𝛅−

N OH

2. Intramolecular hydrogen bond

Is the hydrogen bond formed between atoms of the same molecule e.g

a) Between the bases of the DNA molecules

b) Protein molecules
c) In 2 – nitrophenol
d) 2 – hydroxyBezaldehyde. i.e

OH Oδ− Hδ+ Intramolecular

NO2 forming N O δ− hydrogen bond

C−H Forming

OH

NB: The energy associated with hydrogen bond is small compared to the normal covalent
bond.

EFFECT OF HYDROGEN BONDING:

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
  Increased viscosity:

Hydrogen bonding increases the viscosity of liquids leading to reduced volatility and
reduced vapour pressure of that liquid eg in water

 Association of molecules:

Hydrogen bonding leads to association or dimerisation of carboxylic acids when

dissolved in organic solvents like Benzene, doubling the molar mass of the acid.

It also leads to association of hydrogen fluoride molecules forming hydrogen difluoride.

This is because of the small size of hydrogen atom which allows the lone pairs of
electrons to approach closely the hydrogen nucleus and high electronegativity of fluorine
leading to formation of strong hydrogen bond. 𝐻 𝛿+ 𝐹 𝛿−-------𝐻 𝛿+ 𝐹 𝛿−

 Increased boiling and melting point:

Hydrogen bonded molecules like Ammonia, water, hydrogen fluoride have abnormally
high boiling points compared to those of the hydrides of other elements in group (V),
(VI), (VII) respectively, this is because the hydrides of nitrogen, Oxygen and fluorine
associate through hydrogen bonding.

Boiling points of alcohols, amines and carboxylic acids are higher than boiling points of
corresponding alkanes with similar molar mass because of association through hydrogen
bonding and therefore excess energy is needed to break the hydrogen bond.

 Solubility in water:

Phenols, alcohols and carboxylic acids, primary and secondary amines are more soluble
in water than other alkanes of similar molecular mass because of the ability to form
hydrogen bonds with water.

2 – nitrophenol and 2 – hydroxyBenzaldehyde are less soluble in water than their

corresponding isomers because formation of intramolecular hydrogen bond prevents
interaction with neighbouring molecules.

NB: This also explains why 2 – nitrophenol boils at a low temperature than 4 –
nitrophenol.

 Increased volume and decreased density of ice:

Ice is less dense than water and thus floats on it; because the water molecules associate
via extensive intermolecular hydrogen bonding; giving ice an open tetrahedral structure;
with a bigger volume than that of water with the same mass; and since density is

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 inversely proportional to volume, then ice will have a less density than water for a given
mass.

Therefore when ice is heated, hydrogen bonding is progressively broken giving rise to
closely packed liquid structure in the liquid water with decrease in volume and increase
in density.

 A needle covered on the surface of water may float because of surface tension and
hydrogen bonding in water.
Explain the following observations;
(i) hydrogen fluoride has a higher boiling point than hydrogen chloride.
(ii) melting point of 4 – nitrophenol is much higher than that of 2 – nitrophenol.

SHAPES OF MOLECULES/IONS

 Determining shapes of molecules and ions of non –transition elements is based on the
Valence shell Electron pair repulsion theory (VSEPR Theory) which states “ electron
pairs around a central atom repel each other to take up positions as far apart as possible.”
 The electron pairs take up this arrangement so that potential energy due to their
electrostatic repulsion is at a minimums.
 The electron pairs can be bonding (shared) pairs which contribute to the covalent bond or
unshared (lone pairs) i.e. not used in bonding.
 Lone pairs of electrons give a greater repulsion as they are closer to the nucleus. Electron
pair repulsion is in order L.P ↔ L.P > L.P ↔ B.P > B.P ↔ B.P
 According to this theory, multiple bonds (double/ triple bonds) act as single shared
pairs of electrons.
 Therefore the shape of a molecule is based on the electron pairs that it has.

Number of electron pairs Shape of molecule / ion

i. Two pairs Linear

ii. Three pairs Trigonal planar

iii. Four pairs Tetrahedral

iv. Five pairs Trigonal bipyramidal

v. Six pairs Octahedral

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 a) MOLECULES WITH ONLY BONDING PAIRS
In molecules with only bonding pairs and no lone pairs of electrons on the central atom,
the total number of electron pairs equals the number of bonding pairs.
i. Two bonding electron pairs (AX2)
 Shape of the molecule is linear ; because bonding pair around the central atom
repel one another as fully as possible at an angle of 1800 eg
HgCl2, BeCl2, CO2, CS2, HC ≡ CH,
For CO2, O = C =O
ii.Three bonding electron pairs (AX3)
 Shape of the molecule is trigonal planar.
 This is because the 3 bonding electron pairs repel one another equally making the
bonds to lie in the same plane at an angle of 1200 to one another e.g in BCl3,
2− 2−
CO ,SO3, NO , BF3, CH2 = CH2, BBr3, etc
3 3
Generally,

2−
Eg. for BCl3 CO
3

Activity. Draw the shape of nitrate ion, ethene.

NB: (i)According to this theory, in determining shape of ions; if

 the ion has an overall charge of -1, then on top of the number of electrons the
central atom has, we add an extra electron.
 the overall charge on the ion is −2, then add 2 electrons on top of the number
of electrons the central atom has.
 the overall charge on the ion is + 1, number of electrons contributed a central
atom is reduced by 1 and if its +2, it is reduced by 2.

(ii) carbonate and nitrate ions are able to form many resonance structures (are
stable) i.e.
−
For NO 3

𝟐−
For CO
𝟑

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 2− −
(iii) CO and NO 3 are isoelectronic (their central atom has the same
3
electronic structure)

iii) Four bonding pairs (AX4)

 Shape of molecule is tetrahedral as the four electron pairs are distributed

tetrahedrally around the central atom with a bond angle of 109O 28‟.
+ 2− 3− 2−
 E.g; CH4, CHCl3, NH , SO , CCl4, PO , SnCl4 , CrO , Etc
4 4 4 4
−
CH4 NH4 S𝒐𝟐−𝟒 HSO 𝟒

v) Five electron pairs (AX5)

 Shape of molecule is trigonal bipyramidal ;

 because of 5 different regions of electron density (bonds) points towards the five corners
of a trigonal pyramid.
 Examples include; PF5, PCl5, PBr5, PI5

PCl5

vi) Six electron pairs (AX6)

 Shape of molecule is Octahedral ;

 because the 6 bonding pairs repel each other equally; and the 6 bonds point towards the 6
corners of a regular Octahedron.
 Examples include; SF6, SeF6, SeCl6.
Eg;SF6

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
Activity

Draw the structures and name the shape of the following species.

Species Structure Shape

BF3

CHCl3
−
ClO 4
−
NO 3

SO3

b) MOLECULES WITH BOTH BONDING AND LONE PAIRS OF

ELECTRONS.

i. Three electron pairs (2 bonding and 1 lone pair)

 Shape of molecule is V – shaped/ Bent.
 Lone pairs repel bonding pairs more than bonding pairs repel each other.

E.g. SnCl2 SO2 N𝑂2−

O 𝑂−

ii. 4 electron pairs (one lone pair and three bonding pairs)
 3 bonding pairs and 1 lone pair distribute themselves around the central atom such that
the shape is trigonal pyramidal.
 Repulsion is caused by the lone pair and it will lead to a bond angle smaller than
tetrahedral angle of 109.5O in methane
2−
 e.g. NH3 (CH3)3N SO PH3 AsH3 SbH3
3

NB. Bond angle of the hydrides, decreases as you move down the group because,

 Decrease in electro negativity ; decreases the attraction for the bonding electrons for the
elements as you move down the group.

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
  Phosphorous has higher electro negativity than Nitrogen so the bonding pairs of electrons
are closer to Nitrogen in ammonia than they are to P in PH3.
 Closeness of bonding pairs of electrons to the central atom makes them experience greater
repulsion giving rise to a bigger bonding angle.
 In SbH3, Antimony (Sb) has a much lower electronengativity ; therefore a lower nuclear
attraction for bonding electrons and hence bonding pairs of electrons are further away
from the central atom making them repel one another to a small extent reducing bond
angle further.
iii. Four electron pairs (2 bonding pairs and 2 lone pairs)
 The repulsive effect of two lone pairs on the two bonding pairs reduces the bond
angle to 104.5O giving rise to a bent/ v- shaped molecule.
−
 E.g H2O, ClO 2

Activity

1. Given the following hydrides HF, NH3, H2O

a) i) State the type of intermolecular forces present in the hydrides
ii) In which hydride, are the intermolecular forces strongest. Explain your
answer.
iii) Which of the three hydrides has the highest boiling point?
b) i) Draw the shapes of NH3 and H2O molecules and account fosr the difference in
bond angles in these molecules.

SOLID STRUCTURES

Two types of solid structures exist namely;

 giant structures
 simple molecular structures.

(a) Giant structures:

 consist of a large continuous arrangement of particles (ions or atoms) which makes up a

lattice.
 bonding forces in giant lattice maybe covalent e.g in diamond, graphite or maybe ionic
e.g in sodium chloride or metallic e.g. in copper.

Types of giant structures:

 Giant ionic structure

 Giant metallic structure
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
  Giant covalent structure
 Giant ionic structures:
 Negatively charged ions and positively charged ions are held by strong electrostatic
forces of attraction.
 In a NaCl crystal, each ion is surrounded by 6 others of opposite charge. The crystal
structure is a regular three dimensional pattern of closed packed Na+ alternating with
chloride ions forming an ionic lattice.
 structure of NaCl shows 6 – 6 coordination.
 Na+ and Cl – crystalise in a pattern which is face centered cubic lattice

Note: Coordination number of the cat ion is the number of anions that can surround one cat ion.

Structure of NaCl:

 Caesium chloride also shows a giant ionic structure(research the drawing)

Properties of Giant ionic structure
 High melting point due to very strong bonds
 Dissolve in polar solvents as they consist of charged ions
 Conduct electricity in solution or when in molten.
 Very strong but brittle as a shift in the layer split the lattice
 Have a crystalline structure due to ionic lattice.
 Giant Covalent structure/ Giant molecular structure:

Solid in Giant covalent structure include Diamond , graphite, silicon oxide, silicon
carbide and Boron nitride.

Structure of diamond:
 Each Carbon atom forms 4 bonds to 4 other carbon atoms.
 The 4 atomic orbitals tetrahedrally arrange themselves around the carbon atom which
results in a tetrahedral arrangement of carbon atoms in diamond.
 Carbon atoms are attached to each other in a 3 Dimensional arrangement.
 In diamond, the 4 Valence electrons are all involved in bonding therefore no free
electrons left to conduct electricity.
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
  It‟s the hardest substance known due to the strength of the carbon – carbon bonds and
the geometrical rigidity of the structure (very closed parked nature of carbon atoms)
Structure of graphite:
 Consists of two dimensional layers of joined hexagonal rings, the layers are held by
weak Van der waals forces of attraction.
 Within each layer, each carbon atom is covalently bonded to 3 other carbon atoms.
 remaining valence electrons are delocalized which enable graphite to conduct
electricity and responsible for its shinny appearance.
 Weak Van der waals forces between layers result in much wider separation hence
graphite has a low density (2.3 gcm-3) than diamond.
 Weak Van der waals forces of attraction cause these layers to slide past each other
thus slippery nature of graphite.

1st layer

2nd layer

Structure of Silicon (IV) oxide (SiO2), Silica

 It forms a 3dimensional structure.
 The Si – O bonds about each Silicon atom are tetrahedrally distributed and each
Oxygen atom is bonded to two other Silicon atoms.
 Because of the strong covalent bonds, no ions and free electrons, silica is hard, has a
high melting point and boiling point does not dissolve in water and does not conduct
electricity.

NB: The strong covalent bonds holding these giant molecules together give the
substances high melting point and make them non volatile (having high boiling point)

 Giant Metallic Structures

 Metal atoms get closely packed in a 3D arrangement, metal atoms are taken to be
individual spheres which touch each other.
 The two main ways in which the spheres can be arranged in a single layer are either
square pattern or hexagonal pattern.
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
  The square/ hexagonal pattern of arrangement gives four main types of metal crystal
structures.
i. Simple cubic structure e.g. Polonium
ii. Body centered cubic structure e.g. group (I) metals such as Caesium.
iii. Hexagonal closed packed structures e.g. Mg, Zn, and Titanium etc
iv. Face centered cubic structure e.g. Al, Cu, Ag and gold.

(b) Simple Molecular Structure:

 Occurs in molecules like Iodine, Solid CO2 (Dry ice), Bromine and Cl2 at low
temperatures.
 Vander Waals forces of attraction holding molecules are much weaker than forces
holding atoms in the molecules.
 Solid CO2 sublimes above −78OC on absorbing heat from the surrounding, thus used
as a refrigerant in food industry and for laboratory work.

Question;

Explain the following observations

a) Diamond is hard and an electrical insulator.

b) Graphite is soft and a good electrical conductor
c) Both Na and Cu are good electrical conductors
d) CO2 is a non polar molecule while SO2 is a polar molecule.
e) The boiling points of tertiary amines are lower than those of primary amines of the same
molecular mass.

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
THERMOCHEMISTRY/THERMODYNAMICS.
Thermochemistry is the study of energy changes accompanying chemical reactions.
During chemical reactions, energy is absorbed to break the bonds between atoms and energy
is given out when new bonds are formed.
Thermochemistry investigates the;
 position of equilibrium in the reaction,
 feasibility of the reaction and,
 how far the reaction can go.
TYPES OF CHEMICAL REACTIONS

Chemical reactions are grouped according to whether heat is gained/ lost during the reaction.

i. Endothermic reactions
 Are reactions which proceed with absorption of heat from the surrounding.
 It is denoted with a positive enthalpy change
 Products are at a higher energy level than the reactants

Energy level diagram for endothermic reactions

Potential Energy

( kJmol-1) H2 Products

∆H = +ve

H1 Reactants

Reaction coordinate
Examples of endothermic reactions include;

 Photosynthesis
 Dissolution of Ammonium nitrate in water
 Change of state e.g. vaporization and melting

ii. Exothermic reactions

 Are reactions which proceed with evolution of heat to the surrounding
 Denoted with a negative enthalpy change
 Products are at a lower energy level than the reactants

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
Energy level diagram for an exothermic reaction
Potential energy

(kJmol−1)

H1 reactants

∆H = negative

H2 products

Reaction coordinate
Examples include

 Dissolution of Sulphuric Acid in water

 Combustion
 Change of state eg freezing and condensation
 Thermit reaction i.e. reduction of Fe2O3 by aluminium

ENTHALPY (H)
Is the energy or heat content of a substance.

Enthalpy change (∆H)

Is the quantity of heat absorbed at constant pressure.
Enthalpy change = Enthalpy of products – enthalpy of reactant

∆H = H2− H1
Where H2 = enthalpy of products
H1 = enthalpy of reactants

Standard enthalpy change (∆HΘ)

Is the heat change when molar quantities of reactants in their standard states react to give
products.
NB: Standard state of the substance is the pure substance in the specified state (solid, liquid or
gas) at 1 atmosphere and 298K.
The values of enthalpy change depend on;
i. Temperature at which reaction is taking place
ii. Pressure of the gaseous reactants and products
iii. Physical state of reactants (solid, liquid or gas)
iv. Amount of reactants and products

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
TYPES OF ENTHALPY CHANGES
a) Standard enthalpy change of formation (∆𝐇𝐟𝛉 )
Is the enthalpy change that occurs when one mole of a substance is formed from its elements
in their normal physical state at standard temperature and pressure (STP)
e.g. Al(s) + 3 2O2 (g) → Al2O3 (s) ∆Hfθ (298K) = −1676 KJmol-1
Enthalpy of formation of substances are always negative and cannot be measured
experimentally but are determined indirectly using the Born Haber cycle.
Standard enthalpy of formation of elements at standard conditions is equal to zero.
Standard enthalpy of formation is related to the stability of substances i.e.
 the more negative the value of standard enthalpy change of formation, the more
stable the compound will be,
 and the positive value of ∆Hfθ indicates that the compound is likely to be thermally
unstable or may not form at all.
b) Standard enthalpy change of combustion ∆𝐇𝐜𝛉 )
Is the enthalpy change that occurs when one mole of a substance is completely burnt in O2 under
standard conditions of temperature and pressure (STP) e.g. heat of combustion of Carbon.

C(s) + O2 (g) ⟶ CO2 (g) ∆Hcθ = − 393KJmol−1

Experimental determination of enthalpy of combustion of a substance

Setup:

Electric current

Thermometer

Stirrer

Bomb crucible containing

Calorimeter substance
Water
Procedure:

 A known mass , wg of substance is placed in a crucible suspended in a bomb calorimeter.

 The bomb calorimeter is then filled with oxygen at a pressure of 25 atmospheres and inserted
in a calorimeter fitted with thermometer and stirrer containing a fixed volume of water.
 The initial temperature, T10C of the water is noted, and then the substance is heated by
passing electric current through the platinum wire in contact with it.
 Substance burns and the heat generated raise the temperature of water.
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 Maximum temperature, T20C of water is then noted.

Results:

Let

mg be the mass of water

wg be mass of substance
Mr be the RMM of substance
Temperature rise (T20C − T10C) = ∆T
C the specific heat capacity of water
P heat produced by heater

Treatment of results:

Assumption:

 Neglecting the heat gained by the calorimeter, then heat evolved by burning the substance
and heat produced by the heater is equal to the heat gained by water.
Heat evolved by substance and heater = heat absorbed by water
Heat absorbed by water = mc∆T J
Heat evolved by substance = (mc∆T − P)
Wg of substance evolves (mc∆T − P) J
Mr will evolve= - (𝐦𝐜∆𝐓−𝐏
𝐖
)
× Mr

Experimental determination of enthalpy of combustion of ethanol

Setup:

Thermometer
Stirrer
Calorimeter

water

Heat shield

Burner

Ethanol

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
Procedure:

 A known amount of cold water is weighed into a calorimeter.

 The initial temperature of the cold water is determined, T0OC
 Some ethanol is added to a burner and the mass of the burner plus the ethanol before
burning is determined, wog.
 The wick is lit and the flame kept steady under water.
 The water is constantly stirred until a reasonable rise in temperature is noted.
 The flame is extinguished and the highest temperature T1OC is determined.

Results

 Mass of water = mg
 Initial temperature of water = T0OC
 Final temp. of water = T1OC
 Mass of burner + ethanol before burning = wog
 Mass of burner + ethanol after burning = w1g
 SHC of water = C Jg-1C-1

Treatment of results:

Assumption:

 Neglecting heat gained by calorimeter; heat evolved by burning ethanol is equal to heat
absorbed by water.
 Temperature rise, ∆T = (T1 – T0) 0C
 Mass of ethanol burnt = (wo – w1)g
 Heat evolved = heat absorbed by water
 RMM of ethanol = 46
If (wo – w1) g of ethanol evolves mc∆T J
mc ∆T ×46
∴ 46g will evolve − (wo – w1)g
𝐦𝐜∆𝐓 ×𝟒𝟔
∴ Heat of combustion = − J
(𝐰𝐨 – 𝐰𝟏)

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
LAWS OF THERMOCHEMISTRY

There are 2 laws of thermochemistry both of which are based on the principle of conservation
of energy.

1st Law:
States that, “the amount of heat energy required to decompose a compound into its
elements is equal in magnitude but opposite in sign to the amount of heat energy given
out when the compound is formed.”

e.g. NaCl (s) + (aq) ⟶ Na+ (aq) + Cl− (aq) ∆H = +776KJ

Na+ (aq) + Cl− (aq) ⟶ NaCl(s) ∆H = −776KJ

2nd Law (Hess’s law of heat summation)

States that, “enthalpy change of a chemical reaction at constant temperature and pressure is
the same irrespective of the number of stages passed but will depend on the initial and final
stages of the reaction.
Consider conversion of A to B.

a
a) A B A a B

x z

C y D
a=x+y+z

Applications of Hess’s law

 Used to determine heats of reaction which cannot be determined experimentally from given
thermochemical data e.g. determining the enthalpy of formation of a compound by using
enthalpy of combustion of elements that make up a compound.
When carrying out calculations involving Hess‟s law;
 All enthalpy changes must have correct signs.
 Reversing the reaction also changes the sign of the enthalpy change
 Multiplying or dividing thermochemical equation by certain number also multiplies
or divides the enthalpy change by the same number.
 States of the reactants and products must always be specified.

Examples:
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
1. Calculate the enthalpy change of formation of Carbon monoxide given that the enthalpy of
combustion of carbon is −393kJmol-1, and the enthalpy of combustion of carbon monoxide is
– 286kJmol-1

Solution:

1
Expected equation; C(s) + 2 O2 (g) ⟶ CO ∆Hθf = ?
i. C(s) + O2 (g) ⟶ CO2 (g) ∆Hθc = −393kJmol-1
1
ii. CO(g) + 2 O2 (g) ⟶ CO2 (g) ∆Hθc = – 286kJmol-1
Reversing equation (ii) and adding equation (i)
i. C(s) + O2(g) ⟶ CO2 (g) ∆Hθc = −393kJmol-1

+
1
ii. CO2(g) ⟶ CO2(g) + 2 O2 (g) ∆Hθc = +286kJmol-1

1
C(s) + 2 O2 (g) ⟶ CO (g) ∆Hθf = − 107kJmol-1

2. Calculate the enthalpy change of formation of methane from the following thermochemical
data.
Enthalpy of combustion of Carbon = −393kJmol-1
Enthalpy of combustion of hydrogen = – 286kJmol-1
Enthalpy of combustion of methane = −890kJmol-1

Solution:
Expected equation; C(s) + 2H2 (g) ⟶ CH4 (g) ∆Hθf = ?
i. C(s) + O2 (g) ⟶ CO2 (g) ∆Hθc = −393kJmol-1
1
ii. H2(g) + 2 O2 (g) ⟶ H2O (l) ∆Hθc = −286kJmol-1
iii. CH4(g) + 2O2 (g) ⟶ CO2(g) + 2H2O l ∆H = −890kJmol-1
Multiplying equation (ii) by 2 and reversing (iii) we obtain,

ii. 2H2(g) + O2 (g) ⟶ 2H2O(l) ∆Hθc = − 572kJmol-1

+
iii. CO2 (g) + 2H2O (l) ⟶ CH4 (g) + 2O2 (g) ∆H = +890kJmol-1

iv. 2H2 (g) + CO2 (g) ⟶ CH4 + O2 (g) ∆H =318kJmol-1

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 +
i C(s) + O2(g) ⟶ CO2 g ∆Hθc = −393kJmol-1

C(s) + 2H2 (g) ⟶ CH4 (g) ∆Hθf = −75kJmol-1

Activity:

3. Calculate the enthalpy of reaction;

2C(s) + 2H2 (g) ⟶ C2H4 (g)
Given that enthalpy of combustion of carbon = −393kJmol-1
Enthalpy of combustion of hydrogen = −286kJmol-1
Enthalpy of combustion of ethane = −1393kJmol-1
4. Calculate the heat of formation of ethanol given that the heat of combustion of liquid
ethanol is −649.15kJmol-1 while the enthalpy of formation of CO2 gas and water are –
186.7kJmol-1 and −135.1kJmol-1 respectively.
5. Calculate the heat change of the reaction C2H2 + H2O ⟶ CH3CHO from the following
data.
Molar heat of combustion of C2H2 = − 1260kJmol-1
Molar heat combustion of CH3CHO = − 1160kJmol-1
6. Calculate the enthalpy of combustion of Benzene given that the enthalpy of combustion
of Carbon is −393kJmol-1, enthalpy of formation of Benzene is +49kJmol-1, and enthalpy
of formation of water is −285kJmol-1.

CALCULATION OF ENTHALPY OF REACTION FROM;

a) Enthalpy of formation:
Enthalpy of a reaction is the difference between the total enthalpy of formation of
products and the total enthalpies of formation of reactants.
Consider the reaction;
∆𝐇𝐑
aA + bB Cc + Dd
Total enthalpy of formation total enthalpy of formation
∆𝐇𝐑 = −
of products of reactants

θ θ θ θ
⟹ ∆HR = c∆H C + d ∆H (D) − a∆H A + b∆H (B)
f f f f

Example:
1. The chemical equation for the combustion of methane is
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 CH4 (g) + 2O2 (g) CO2(g) + 2H2O(l)
Calculate the standard enthalpy change of combustion of methane using the values of
standard enthalpy change for methane, CO2 and water given below.
θ
∆H (CH4) = − 74.4kJmol-1
f
θ
∆H (CO2) = − 393.5 kJmol-1
f
θ
∆H (H2O) = − 285.8 kJmol-1
f
solution
θ
∆H = Total enthalpy of formation of products – total enthalpy of formation of reactants
c
θ θ θ θ θ
∆H = ∆H CO2 + 2 ∆H H2 O − ∆H CH4 + 2∆H (O2 )
c f f f f

= − 393.5 + (2 × −285.8) − − 74.4 + 2 × 0

θ
∆H = − 890.7kJmol-1
c
𝛉
NB. Enthalpy of formation of elements in their standard states is 0, giving ∆𝐇 (02)=0
𝐟
Activity
1. Calculate the heat change in the reaction;
7
2NH3 (g) + 2 O2 (𝑔) 2NO2 (g) + 3H2O (l)
Given the following standard heats of formation in kJmol-1
NH3 (g) − 46.1kJmol-1
H2O (l) − 285.8kJmol-1
NO2 (g) 33.2kJmol-1

b) Bond enthalpy (bond energy)

 Bond enthalpy is the standard enthalpy change that occurs when one mole of a covalent
bond is formed from its constituent gaseous atoms.
 Therefore it is referred to as the bond energy of formation , denoted by a negative value
of enthalpy.
 It can also be defined as the heat change that occurs when one mole of a covalent bond is
broken down into its constituent gaseous atoms
 Therefore it is referred to as the bond dissociation energy , denoted by positive value of
enthalpy e.g.
H2 (g) 2H(g) ∆H = + 431 kJmol-1
2H (g) H2(g) ∆H = − 431kJmol-1
 The standard enthalpy of a reaction is the difference between the sum of average standard
bond enthalpies of products and sum of the average standard bond enthalpies of
reactants.

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
∆Hθ reaction = summation of bond energies - summation of bond energies of bonds
formed
of bonds broken

θ
∆H = Bonds broken – bonds formed
R
Example:
1. Calculate the enthalpy change for the following reaction; N2(g) + 3H2(g) 2NH3(g)
Bond Mean of bond enthalpy

N≡N 945

H−H 436

N−H 391

Solution:
N ≡ N + 3H – H 2H – N – H

H
Bonds broken ; N ≡ N, 3H – H
Bonds formed ; 6 N – H
∆HR = Bonds broken – bonds formed
= 945 + (3 × 436) − 6 × 391
∆HR = − 93kJmol-1

2. The equation of formation of a nitrogen monoxide gas.

1 1
N2(g) + O2 (g) NO(g)
2 2
Calculate the enthalpy change of formation of nitrogen monoxide using the given bond
energies.
Bond Mean of bond enthalpy

N≡N 946kJmol-1

H−H 496 kJmol-1

N−H 630 kJmol-1

ENTHALPY OF ATOMISATION AND AVERAGE BOND ENTHALPY

a) Enthalpy of Atomisation/sublimation/vapourisation

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
  Is the enthalpy change that occurs when one mole of gaseous atoms is formed from
the elements in their normal physical states at standard conditions.
 Enthalpy change is always positive. E.g.
Na(s) Na(g)
1
Cl2 (g) Cl (g)
2
C(s) C(g)
 For a compound, the standard enthalpy of atomization is the heat required to convert
one mole of a compound in its natural state and under standard conditions into
free gaseous atoms.
 For any di-atomic molecule, enthalpy of atomization is HALF the bond energy.
b) Average bond enthalpy/bond energy term
 Is the average value of the standard enthalpy changes required to break a
particular covalent bond in a full range of molecules in which that bond may be
found.
 Calculations based on average standard bond enthalpies give approximate results
since true standard bond enthalpies vary from compound to compound.
Examples:

1. Calculate the C – C bond energy in ethane given that

C(s) C(g) + 713kJmol-1
+
H2(g) 2H(g) 436 kJmol-1
2C(s) + 3H2 (g) C2H6(g) ∆H = − 84kJmol-1
f
Solution
Using the energy level diagram.

2C (g) + 6H (g)

2∆Hsub 3∆Hatm

2C (g) + 3H2 (g) ∆Htotal C − C

∆Hf = −84

C2H6

From Hess‟ law of constant heat summation

(∆H ) =2∆Hsub + 3∆Hatm + Total ∆H (C − C)
f
Total ∆H (C − C) = (∆H )-( 2∆Hsub + 3∆Hatm)
f

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 = − (− 84) - ( 2 × 713) + (3× 436)
= - 2818kJmol-1

OR:
∆Hf
2C (s) + 3H2 C2H6

∆H C−C
f
2C (g) 6H

∆H = 2 × ∆Ha C + 3∆Ha(H) + ∆H C−C

f f
∆H C −C = (∆H ) - ( 2∆Hsub + 3∆Hatm)
f f

= − (− 84) - ( 2 × 713) + (3× 436)

= - 2818kJmol-1
2. (a) The standard enthalpy change of formation of SiCl4 is – 610kJmol-1. The standard
enthalpy change of atomization of Si and Cl are +338 and + 122kJmol-1 respectively. Use
these values to construct a Born Haber cycle for formation of SiCl4 from its elements and
indicate the energy changes involved.
(b) Calculate the average bond energy of the Si-Cl bond. (UNEB 2006 No 9)
Solution

θ
a) ∆H (SiCl4 = − 610kJmol−1
f
θ
∆H (Si) = + 338kJmol−1
a
θ
∆H (Cl2) = + 122 kJmol−1
a

∆ H θf
Si (s) + 2Cl2 (g) SiCl4(s)

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 4∆Hf Si − Cl

θ
∆H Si 4∆Ha (Cl)
a

Si (g) + 4Cl (g)

b) From Hess‟ law of heat summation;

∆Hfθ = ∆Haθ (Si) + 4 Ha (Cl) + 4∆Hf Si − Cl
– 4∆Hf Si − Cl = ∆Hfθ − ∆Haθ (Si) −4 Ha (Cl)
= -610- 338- (4×122)

4∆Hf Si − Cl = − 1436

∆𝐇𝐟 Si − Cl = -359kJmol−1

3. Calculate the enthalpy of formation of chloromethane using the equation.

3 1
C (graphite) + 2H2 (g) + 2 Cl2 (g) CH3Cl (g) given the following
thermochemical data;
Bond energy of C – Cl = 336kJmol-1
Dissociation energy of H−H = 433kJmol-1
Dissociation energy of Cl – Cl = 248kJmol-1
Bond energy of C− H = 413kJmol-1
Enthalpy of vapourisation of graphite = 715kJmol-1
Solution
∆H
3 1 f
C(s) + 2 H2 (g) + 2 Cl2 (g) CH3Cl (g)

3∆Hf (C − H)
∆Hf C − Cl

C (g) + 3H(g) + Cl(g)

NB ∆Hf bonds is negative
From Hess‟ law of heat summation
3 1
∆H = B∆E (H) + 2B∆E (Cl) + 3∆Hf C − H + ∆Hf C − Cl
f 2
3 1
= 715 + × 435 + (2 × 248) – (3×413 + 336)
2
= 1491.5 – 1575
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 ∆H = − 83.5kJmol−1
𝐟
Activity
1 . Calculate the average (C− H) Bond energy from the following enthalpies of reaction
Enthalpy of formation of CO2 = − 393kJmol-1
Enthalpy of formation of H2O = − 286kJmol-1
Enthalpy of formation of CH4 = − 890kJmol-1
Enthalpy of Atomisation of C2 = 714kJmol-1
Enthalpy of Atomisation of H2 = 436kJmol-1
2. (a) What is meant by Bond energy?
(b) The figure below shows/ represents the energy diagram for formation of CH4
∆H1
C(s) + 2H2 (g) CH4 (g)

∆H3 ∆H2 ∆H4

C (g) + 4H (g)

Identify the energy changes ∆H1, ∆H2, ∆H3 and ∆H4 given that;

(c) ∆H1 = − 75kJmol-1, ∆H2 = +218kJmol-1 of H2 atom, ∆H3 = +715kJmol-1

Calculate the value of:

i. ∆H4
ii. Bond energy of C – H bond

3. Calculate the standard enthalpy of formation of C2H4 in kJmol-1 from the following
C = C Bond energy = 606kJmol-1
C – H bond energy = 410kJmol-1
H – H Bond energy =435kJmol-1
Heat of sublimation of Carbon = 710kJmol-1

BORN – HABER CYCLE

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
  Is the enthalpy cycle used to calculate the standard enthalpy changes which occur when an
ionic compound is formed from its elements.
 It is an application of Hess‟ law to ionic compounds.
Enthalpy changes involved in Born Haber cycle include
𝛉 𝛉
i. Standard enthalpy of Sublimation/ Vaporisation (∆H / ∆H )
𝐬 𝐫𝐚𝐩
𝛉
ii. Standard enthalpy of atomization (∆H ):
𝐚𝐭
Is the enthalpy change when one mole of gaseous atoms is formed from an element in
standard state.
iii. Standard enthalpy of ionization (∆H )
𝐈𝐄
Is the enthalpy change accompanying the removal of one mole of electrons from an
atom in gaseous phase e.g. for Sodium;
θ -1
Na (g) Na+ (g) + e ∆H𝐈𝐄 (298K) = +498kJmol
 When an electron is removed from a singly positively charged ion in the gaseous phase,
enthalpy change is described as 2nd ionization enthalpy
 i.e. Na+ Na2+ +2e
iv. electron affinity/Electron gain enthalpy
Is the standard enthalpy change accompanying the addition of one electron to an atom in
the gas phase. i.e.
θ
X (g) + e X − (g) ∆H𝐄𝐀 =?

NB: The first electron affinity is negative while the 2nd electron affinity in positive
because work must be done to add the 2nd electron against repulsive forces exerted by
the first electrons.

𝛉
v. Standard lattice enthalpy (∆H )
𝐋
Is the enthalpy change when one mole of an ionic compound is formed from its gaseous ions
under standard conditions i.e.
θ
M+(g) + X −(g) MX (s) (∆H = negative)
L
OR: Is the enthalpy absorbed when one mole of an ionic compound is decomposed into its
gaseous ions.
θ
MX(s) M+(g) + X− (g) (∆H = positive)
L
Consider the formation of one mole of MX solid where M is a metal and X is a gas with a
diatomic molecule.

Equation of formation of MX
M(s) + ½X2 (g) MX(s)
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 Born Haber cycle showing energy changes involved:

M+(g) + X(g)

∆HIE 1st EA

M (g) ∆Hat M +(g) + X−(g)

∆H sub

1
M(s) + X2 (g)
2
∆HL
∆Hf

MX(s)

From Hess‟ law

∆H = ∆H + ∆H + ∆H + EA + ∆H
𝐟 𝐬𝐮𝐛 𝐈𝐄 𝐚𝐭 𝐋
Example:
1. (a) Draw a Born Haber for the formation of solid Rubidium chloride from its elements
(b) Calculate the electron affinity of chlorine atom. Use the following data;
Lattice energy of Rubidium chloride = −665kJmol-1
Dissociation energy of chlorine gas molecule = 226kJmol-1
Heat of atomization of Rubidium metal = 84kJmol-1
Standard heat of formation of solid Rubidium chloride is – 439kJmol-1
I.E. of Rubidium atom = 397kJmol-1

Solution
1.
(a) Rb+(g) + Cl (g)

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 ∆HIE 1st EA
B∆E
Rb(g) ∆Hatm = Rb+(g) + Cl −(g)
2

∆Hsub
1
Rb+(g) + 2
Cl2 (g) ∆HL

Rb Cl (s)

(b) From Hess‟ law;

∆H = ∆H + ∆H + ∆H + E.A + ∆H
f sub IE at L
EA = ∆H – (∆H + ∆H + ∆H + ∆H )
f sub IE at L
= −439 – (84 + 397 + 226
2 + −665)
1st EA = − 368kJmol-1

Activity
1. Draw a Born Haber cycle for the reaction of Lithium(Solid) and F(g) to form LiF(s) and
indicate clearly whether the change is exo/endothermic.
using the data below;
Enthalpy of atomization of Fluorine molecule = + 150kJmol-1
Enthalpy of sublimation of Lithium metal = 155kJmol-1
Ionization energy of Lithium atom = 518kJmol-1
Standard enthalpy of formation of solid LiF =?
Lattice enthalpy = − 1030 kJmol-1
Electron affinity of F = − 351 kJmol-1

2. Calculate the lattice energy of CaCl2 from the following thermochemical data;
Standard enthalpy of atomization of CaCl2 = − 795kJmol-1
Standard enthalpy of atomization of Chlorine = +717kJmol-1
First ionization energy of calcium = + 121 kJmol-1
2nd ionization energy of Calcium =1100 kJmol-1
First electron affinity of Cl = − 364 kJmol-1

3. Using the data below construct an energy level diagram and hence calculate the lattice energy
of CuO(s)
Enthalpy kJmol-1
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
Atomization of Cu +339
1st IE of Cu +745
Atomization of O2 + 248
2nd IE of Cu +1960
1st EA of O2 −141

FACTORS AFFECTING LATTICE ENERGY

Ionic charge
 The larger the ionic charge, the bigger the lattice energy
 because of the strong electrostatic forces of attraction, between the oppositely
charged ions, e.g. the lattice energy of magnesium chloride is larger than that of
Sodium Chloride because the greater charge of Mg2+ strongly attracts the chloride
ions.
Ionic size/radius:
 Lattice energy is inversely proportional to the ionic size i.e. large cat ions have less
attraction for anions because of the reduced effective nuclear charge. (Large
distance of approach) e.g. NaCl has a bigger lattice energy than KCl because the
K+ has a bigger radius than Na+.
Consider the halides of Na and their values of lattice energy.
NaF −795kJmol−1
NaCl −761kJmol−1
NaBr −742kJmol−1
NaI −699kJmol−1
Trend:
 Lattice energy of the halides decreases down the group
Explanation:
 Lattice energy of NaF is the greatest since there is greater attraction of the F− to the
Na+.
 Lattice energy of NaI is the smallest because I− has the biggest size and therefore is
least attracted by the Sodium Ion (Na+)

ENTHALPY OF SOLUTION
Is the enthalpy change that occurs when one mole of crystal ionic compound is dissolved in a
specified number of moles of water at standard conditions.
θ
∆H solution
MX(s) + aq M+ (aq) + X− (aq)
The enthalpy change accompanying the dissolution of an ionic salt in water is either positive or
negative
The dissolution of an ionic compound involves two energy terms;
i. Separating the ionic lattice into oppositely charged gaseous ions ie
MX (s) M+ (g) + X− (g) ∆H = positive
L
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 The energy required is the lattice dissociation and is an endothermic process
ii. Hydration/ solvation of the oppositely charged gaseous ions and it‟s an exothermic
process.ie
M+ (g) + X− (g) + (aq) M+ (aq) + X− (aq) ∆Hhydration = negative
Definition
Enthalpy of Hydration/ Solvation is the heat evolved when 1 mole of gaseous ions is
completely surrounded by water molecules i.e.
𝛉 𝛉 𝛉
∆𝐇 𝐬𝐨𝐥𝐮𝐭𝐢𝐨𝐧 = ∆𝐇 lattice dissociation + ∆𝐇 solvation (Hydration)
Born Haber cycle showing the relationship between the enthalpy of solution, lattice
dissociation energy and hydration energy of salt MX

∆H solution
MX(s) + (aq) MX (aq)
lattice
dissociation ∆H hydration
enthalpy

M+(g) + X− + aq

OR
M+(g) + X-(g) + aq

Lattice dissociation enthalpy

∆H hydration

MX(s)

∆H solution

M+(aq) + X –(aq

Factors affecting enthalpy of solution

 Lattice energy
 Hydration energy

When the
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
  lattice dissociation is greater than the hydration, enthalpy of solution is endothermic,
 the hydration energy is greater than lattice dissociation enthalpy, the enthalpy of solution
is exothermic.
For an ionic compound to dissolve in water, the lattice dissociation energy should be overcome
by the hydration enthalpy so that an overall negative enthalpy of solution is obtained i.e.
compounds that dissolve exothermically are more soluble than those which dissolve
endothermically.

Example:
The enthalpies of hydration and lattice energy of some salts are given below;

Salt Enthalpy of hydration Lattice energy (kJmol-1)

(kJmol-1)

KCl − 692 + 718

LiCl − 883 + 862

a) Calculate the heats of solution of K and Li Chloride. State whether dissolution is

endothermic or exothermic process in each case.
b) Which of the following two salts will be more soluble in water at a given temperature. Give
a reason for your answer.
c) How would you expect the solubility of these two salts to change with temperature?

Solution
a) ∆H = ∆H hydration + ∆H lattice energy
soln
⟹ ∆H soln (KCl) = − 692 + 718
= + 26kJmol-1
∆Hsoln (LiCl) = − 883 + 862
= − 21kJmol-1
KCl, dissolution is endothermic because enthalpy of solution is positive
LiCl dissolution is exothermic because enthalpy of solution is negative
b) LiCl, because enthalpy of solution is negative
c) KCl, solubility increases with increase in temperature because it requires more energy to
dissolve (enthalpy of solution is positive)
LiCl, solubility decreases with increase in temperature because enthalpy of solution is
exothermic.

2 (a) Define the term molar enthalpy of hydration

(b) The table below shows the enthalpies of Mg2+ and Cl−

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 Ions Enthalpy of hydration (kJmol−1)

Mg2+ 1891

Cl− 381

i. State whether the values of enthalpies of hydration given in the table above is positive
or negative. Give a reason for your answer
(ii) Calculate the enthalpy of hydration of MgCl2 UNEB 2003
Solution
i. The values of both enthalpies are negative
Reason
− Hydration of both ions involves attraction of water molecules releasing a lot of heat
energy.
− ∆H hydration of MgCl2 = ∆H Hydration of Mg2+ + 2∆H hydration of Cl−
= − 1891 + 2 × − 381
= − 2663kJmol−1
Activity
a) Explain the term molar enthalpy of solution
b) Draw a diagram to show the energy changes that takes place when a salt MX (s) is dissolved
in water.
NB
(i) Anhydrous salts e.g. Anhydrous CuSO4 dissolve more exothermically than the
hydrated salts (with water of crystallisation) e.g. CuSO4.5H2O.
Reason:
 CuSO4 (hydrated) dissolves endothermically, because ions are already
partially hydrated so that when it dissolves its lattice energy outweighs the
enthalpy associated with any further hydration.
 Anhydrous CuSO4, the ions will have to attract more water molecules and
become surrounded by the water molecule. This increases its hydration energy
more than the lattice energy, the salt will dissolve with evolution of energy.
ii. Polar solvents like water dissolve in ionic substances because they have large dipoles
interacting strongly with solute ions which results in a high negative enthalpy of
solvation,
− Non polar solvents such as hydrocarbons do not dissolve ionic substance because there
is no negative enthalpy of solvation to compensate for the positive lattice dissociation
enthalpy.
Qn: a) Predict whether or not KI is likely to be soluble in cyclohexane
b) Explain your answer in (a) above

Experimental determination of senthalpy of solution of an ionic compound:

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
Set up
Thermometer
Solution

Cork
calorimeter
stirrer empty beaker
to prevent heat loss

water

Procedure:

 A known mass, m1g of water is placed in a calorimeter fixed with a stirrer and
thermometer and the temperature T1 is noted.
 A known mass m2g of finely powdered sample of an ionic compound is carefully added
to the water in the calorimeter.
 The solution is stirred thoroughly until the thermometer shows no more heat change.
 Determine and record the final steady temperature, T2 ℃ of the solution.

Results:
Mass of water = m1g
Mass of solute = m2g
Initial temperature of water = T1OC
Final temperature of solution = T2OC
∆Temperature = ∆T (T1 – T2) or (T2 – T1)
RFM of compound = Mr
SHC of solution = C
Mass of solution = (m1 + m2) g
Treatment of results:
Assumption:
 Calorimeter has negligible heat loss
 Density of water = 1gcm-3
Heat evolved = mass of solution × SHC × ∆T
= (m1 + m2) × C × ∆T
m2
Moles of ionic compound = moles
Mr
m
∴ M 2 envolved (m1 + m2) × C × ∆T
r
(m1 + m2) × C × ∆T × Mr
1 mole of solution = m2

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 (𝐦𝟏 + 𝐦𝟐) × 𝐂 × ∆𝐓 × 𝐌𝐫
∆Hsolution = J
𝐦𝟐
QN: P2 (2006(4))

STANDARD ENTHALPY OF NEUTRALISATION

Is the enthalpy change when one mole of H+ reacts completely with one mole of –OH to form
one mole of water. i.e. H+ (aq) + –OH (aq) H2O (l)

NB: The
 enthalpies of neutralization of strong acids and strong bases are usually constant
and high because the strong acids and strong bases are fully ionized giving many
free hydrogen ions and hydroxyl ions which then react readily to release a lot of
heat.
 enthalpies of neutralization of weak acids and weak bases or strong base and vice
versa are usually low and inconsistent because in the neutralization of weak
acids or base, some energy is used fast in the ionization and later for
neutralization.
Experimental determination of enthalpy of neutralization (HCL and NaOH)

Procedure:

 A known volume Vcm3 of 2M HCl is measured and placed into a plastic cup, its initial
temperature T1 is noted.
 An equal volume of 2M NaOH is placed into another plastic cup and its initial temperature
T2 is noted.
 NaOH is then carefully added to the cup containing the acid with constant stirring.
 Highest temperature T3 attained is noted.

Results:

 Initial temperature of 2M HCl = T1OC SHC of solution = C

 Initial temperature of 2M NaOH = T2OC
T +T
 Mean initial temperature of mixture = 1 2 2 OC
 Final temperature of mixture = T3OC
 Volume of solution(mixture) = 2Vcm3
 Total mass of mixture = 2Vg, assuming density of solution is 1gcm−3
Treatment of results
Heat change = mass of solution X C.∆T
Heat change = (2V × C × ∆T) J
Equation: NaOH (aq) + HCl (aq) NaCl (aq) + H2O (l)
3
1000cm of solution contain 2 moles of HCl
2V
Vcm3 of solution contains moles
1000

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 Mole ratio 1 HCl : 1 H2O
2V
Moles of water formed moles
1000
2V
moles of water envolved 2V.C.∆T
1000
2V .C.∆T ×1000
1 mole of water = 2V
∆𝐇 𝐧𝐞𝐮𝐭𝐫𝐚𝐥𝐢𝐬𝐚𝐭𝐢𝐨𝐧 = −(𝐂∆𝐓. 𝟏𝟎𝟎𝟎)𝐉

Example:
When 100cm3 of 2M HCl was added to 100cm3 of 2M NaOH, the temperature rose by 13OC.
Calculate the enthalpy of neutralization assuming density of solution and Specific heat
capacity of the resultant solution are 1g/cm3 and 4.2Jg-1K-1 respectively.
Solution:
Total volume = 200cm3
Mass of solution = 200 × 𝜌
= 200g
Heat change = mass of solution × SHC × ∆T
= 200 × 4.2 × 13
= 10920J
H (aq) + OH
+ − H2O (l)
1000cm of solution contains 2 moles of HCl
3
2 ×100
100cm3 of solution contains moles of HCl
1000
Mole ratio; 1mole of acid: 1 mole of water
⟹ Moles of water formed = 0.2 moles
0.2 moles of water = 10920 , 1mole of water evolves (10920/0.2)
∆ Heat of neutralization = − 54600J

Exercise

1. 50cm3 of NaOH solution of concentration 0.4M required 20cm3 of H2SO4 of concentration.

0.5M for neutralization. A temperature rise of 3.4OC was realized. If both solutions and
calorimeter were at the same temperature, find the standard enthalpy of neutralization of
NaOH with H2SO4 (SHC of calorimeter = 39JK−1 and 4.2Jg−1K−1)

HEAT OF PRECIPITATION

Is the heat change when one mole of ionic compound is precipitated from the solution.

Example

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
1. When 50cm3 of 1M NaCl solution and 50cm3 of 1M AgNO3 solution are mixed, there is a
temperature rise of 7.5OC. Calculate the enthalpy of precipitation of AgCl assuming the SHC
and density of the resulting solution is 4.2Jg−1k−1 and 1gcm-3 respectively.

Solution

Total volume of solution = 100cm3

Mass of solution = 100g
Heat produced = mass of solution × SHC of solution × temperature rise
= 100 × 4.2 × 7.5
= 3150J
3
1000cm of NaCl solution contains 1 mole
1 ×50
50cm3 of NaCl solution contains moles
1000
Moles of NaCl = 0.05moles
1 mole of NaCl produces 1 mole of AgCl
0.05moles of NaCl will produce 0.05moles of AgCl
0.05moles of AgCl produced 3150J of heat.
3150
1 mole of AgCl produced J of heat
0.05
Enthalpy of precipitation = − 63000J
Exercise

2. a) Define the term heat of precipitation

b) 25cm3 of 0.5M AgNO3 solution was added to 25.0cm3 of 0.5M NaCl solution in
an insulated container. The temperature of the resulting mixture rose by 3OC.
Assuming the container has a negligible heat capacity and the SHC of the
resulting mixture is 4.2 Jg-1OC-1. Calculate the heat of precipitation of AgCl.

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 CHEMICAL KINETICS
Chemical kinetics is the study of rates of reaction and factors affecting rates of reaction.

Rates of reaction

Is the rate of change in concentration of one of the products or reactants.

Rate of reaction decreases as the reaction proceeds and the reactant is gradually used up.
Consider a reaction A B;
d[A]
Rate of decrease in concentration of A = − dt

d[B]
Rates of increase in concentration of B = dt

Units of reaction rates is concentration per time e.g. moles per dm3 per second (moldm−3s−1)
The rate at the start of the reaction, when an infinitesimally small amount of the reactant has
been used up is called the initial rate.

Variation of concentration of reactants and products with time

Concentration
(molsdm−3)
Initial rate t = 0 product

Reactant

Time(s)
Initial rate of reaction can be obtained by finding the slope/ tangent to the curve at time, t = 0.

METHODS OF FINDING THE RATES OF CHEMICAL REACTIONS

a) Chemical analysis
 Here, the reaction is carried out in a thermostatically controlled water bath.
 Solutions of the reactants of known concentration are mixed and a stop clock started.
 A sample of a reaction mixture is withdrawn with a pipette and the reaction is stopped/
quenched by either cooling or dilution into a freezing mixture or into an excess of
solvent.

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 Titration is performed to find the concentration of one of the reactants or products. E.g.
oxidation of Iodide to Iodine by hydrogen peroxide.
− +
H2O2 (aq) + I(aq ) + 2H(aq ) I2 (aq) + 2H2O (l)
 Solutions of hydrogen peroxide, acid and Iodine of known concentrations are allowed to
reach the temperature of the thermostat bath.
 Solutions are mixed and the time of mixing noted.
 At measured time intervals, sample of reaction mixtures are extracted by pipette.
 Reaction in each sample is quenched by diluting in ice cold water.
 Each sample is titrated against standard aqueous sodium thiosulphite and the
concentration of Iodine is calculated.
b) Electrical conductivity:
 Conductivity of a reaction mixture may be monitored overtime by carrying out the
reaction in a conductivity cell.
 Conductivity apparatus is calibrated with solutions of known concentration
 Conductivity of a solution is proportional to the concentration of its ions and the charges
they bear.
c) Colorimetry
 Applicable to reaction mixtures that show a steady colour as the reaction as the proceeds.
 Colorimeter indicates concentration by measuring the intensity of light shining through a
coloured reaction mixture.
 Photocell is calibrated with solutions of known concentrations
 Light of fixed wavelength is directed through the reaction mixture and into the photocell.
 Photocell develops an emf proportional to the intensity of the light.
 Emf can then be converted to concentration values.
d) Change in gas volume:

 For reactions involving gases, the rate of reaction may be monitored by measuring the
volume of gas evolved after various time intervals.
 The measured volume of gas may then be used to calculate the corresponding
concentration of the reactant. e.g. reaction of a metal with acid and the decomposition of
hydrogen peroxide.
Mg (s) + 2HCl (aq) MgCl2 (aq) + H2 (g)
2H2O2 (aq) 2H2O (l) + O2 (g)
a) Change in pressure
 An increase or decrease in gaseous pressure can be used to follow many gaseous
reactions e.g.
1
i. The reaction: N2O5 (g) N2O4 (g) + 2 O2(g)
 It involves an increase in the number of moles of gas and an increase in pressure can
be followed.
ii. The reaction: H2 (g) + O2 (g) H2O (l) is accompanied by a decrease in the
number of moles, and decrease in pressure at constant volume.
b) Spectrophotometry
 Applicable for the reactions which are extremely rapid.
 Uses a very short burst of light from a laser to start reaction that is sensitive to light.
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
  Spectroscopic techniques then monitor the concentration of the reactive intermediate
formed.

SOME COMMON TERMS

i. Rate law:
 States that, “the rate of any chemical reaction at a constant temperature is directly
proportional to the molar concentration of the reactants raised to appropriate power
whose value is experimentally determined.”
 It summarises the relationship between rate of a chemical reaction and the
concentration of the reactants.
ii. Rate equation:
 Expresses the rate of reaction in terms of the concentration of each reactant raised to a
specific power. Consider a reaction A + B Products
From Rate law; Rate ∝ A x B Y Rate =k A x B Y
Where k = rate constant/ coefficient

X = order of reaction with respect to A

Y = Order of reaction with respect to B

iii. Rate constant / Rate coefficient:

Is the ratio of the rate of a chemical reaction to the products of the concentration of the
reactants raised to appropriate powers as in the rate equation.
Units vary according to the overall order i.e.
From Rate = k A x B Y
Rate
K= A x B Y
iv. Order of reaction
Is the power to which the concentration terms are raised in the experimental rate
equation
v. Overall order equation\
Is the sum of the powers to which the concentration terms are raised in the experimental
rate equation.
From Rate = k A x B Y
Overall order = x + y
vi. Molecularity of a reaction:
Is the total number of species (ions/ molecules) involved in a particular reaction i.e the
number of species involved in the rate determining step for those reactions occurring in
stages.

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 Difference between molecularity and order of a reaction

Molecularity Order of equation

 Only whole numbers and is never zero Can be a fraction, zero or a whole number

 Determined from a Stoichiometric equation Experimentally determined

 Number of species that take part in the rate Power to which the concentration of the
determining state reactant is raised in the experimental rate
equation

vii. Rate determining step/Rate limiting step:

Is the slowest step in a multi step chemical reaction through which the reactants are
converted to the products.
viii. Elementary reactions:
These are reactions that involve one step path or route from reactants to products.
For elementary reactions, molecularity is equal to the order of reaction.
However, the reactions which are not elementary, molecularity may not be equal to order of
reaction. E.g. in hydrolysis of a reactant such as ester/ sucrose in presence of a large excess
of water.
Consider hydrolysis of sucrose;
Sucrose + water Glucose + Fructose
C12H22O11 + H2O C6H12O6 + C6H12O6
Molecularity of above reaction is two because both sucrose and water are involved in the rate
determining step.
However, the overall order of this reaction is first order when experimentally determined.
Reason
 Water is present in large excess, its concentration remains unaffected and hence doesn‟t
contribute to the order of the reaction.
 Only sucrose concentration changes during the course of a reaction, affecting the rate of
reaction with an order one.
NB: Such reactions where water is in excess making its concentration zero is referred to
as pseudo – first order reaction.

DETERMINATION OF ORDER OF REACTION FROM INITIAL RATE METHOD

In this method, the order of reaction with respect to a given reactant is determined by
comparing the initial rate for the experiments in which the concentration of only the reactant
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 whose order of reaction is to be determined is changing while the other reactant
concentrations are kept constant.
It therefore requires more than one reactant.
For zero order reaction;
 the rate of reaction is not affected by change in initial concentration of the reactant e.g.
doubling the concentration of the reactant has no effect on the rate.
For all 1st order reactions;
 doubling the initial concentration of the reactant also doubles the rate,
 Trebling it also trebles the rate i.e. increasing the concentration of reactant by factor y
also increases the rate by some factor y.
For second order reactions;
 doubling or trebling initial concentration of the reactant increases the rate by 4 or 9 times
respectively.

Example:
The result shown refers to oxidation of Bromine ion by Bromate ion in acidic solution.
5Br – (aq) + BrO−3 (aq) + 6H (aq)
+ 3Br2 (aq) + 3H2O (l)

[5Br –](mol dm−3) Br𝐎−

𝟑 (mol dm )
−3 H+(mol dm−3) Initial rate (mol dm−3)

i. 0.10 0.10 0.10 8 × 10 – 4

ii. 0.10 0.20 0.10 1.6 × 10−3

iii. 0.20 0.20 0.10 3.2 × 10−3

iv. 0.10 0.10 0.20 3.2 × 10−3

a) Find the order of the reaction with respect to Br – , Br O3− , H+

b) State the overall order of reaction
c) Write the rate equation
d) Calculate the value of rate constant and state its units.
e) Calculate the rate reaction when concentration of all three reactants is 0.2mol dm−3
Solution
a) (i) Br −
Let the order of the reaction with respect to Br − be x
Let the order of reaction with respect to Br O3− be y
Let the order of reaction with respect to H+ be z
Taking experiments (ii) and (iii)
Rate = K[Br−]X [Br3− ]y [H +]z
1.6 × 10−3 = K [0.10]x [0.2]y [0.10]z ------------------------- (i)

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 3.2 × 10−3 = K [0.2]x [0.2]y [0.1]z ________________________ (ii)
Dividing equation (ii) by (i)
3.2 × 10−3 K[0.2]x [0.2]y [0.1]z
= K [0.10]x [0.2]y [0.10]z
1.6 × 10−3

3.2 × 10−3 0.2 X

=
1.6 × 10−3 0.1
1 x
2 =2
X=1
Order of reaction with Br− is 1
Reason:
Doubling the concentration of Br − doubles the initial rate
(ii) BrO −
3
Taking experiments (i) and (ii)
Rate = K[Br−]X [Br3− ]y [H+]z
For (i); 8 × 10 – 4 = K [0.1]X [0.1 ]y [0.1]z ______________________ (i)
For (ii); 1.6 × 10−3 = K[0.1]X [0.2 ]y [0.1]z ___________________ (ii)
Dividing equation (ii) by (i)
1.6 × 10−3 K[0.1]X [0.2 ]y [0.1]z
= K [0.1]X [0.1 ]y [0.1]z
8 × 10 – 4
1.6 × 10−3 0.2 y
=
8 × 10 – 4 0.1
1 y
2 =2
Y=1
The order of reaction with respect to Br𝐎− 𝟑 is 1
Reason:
Doubling the concentration of BrO−3 doubles the rate.
(iii) H +

Taking experiment (i) and (iv)

Rate = K[Br−]X [Br3− ]y [H+]z
For (i); 8 × 10 – 4 = K [0.1]X [0.1 ]y [0.1]z ______________________ (i)
For (iv): 3.2 × 10−3 = K [0.1]x [0.1]y [0.2]z ________________________ (ii)
Dividing (ii) by (i)
3.2 × 10−3 K [0.1]x [0.1]y [0.2]z
=
8 × 10 – 4 K [0.1]X [0.1 ]y [0.1]z
z
4=2
22 = 2z
Z = 2; Order of reaction with respect to H+ is 2
Reason;
Doubling the reaction with respect to H+ rate increases by factor four (4) (rate quadruples)
b) Rate = K[Br−]1 [Br3− ]1 [H+]2
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 Overall order = 2 + 1 + 1 = 4
c) Rate = K[Br−]1 [Br3− ]1 [H+]2
d) From rate = K[Br−]1 [Br3− ]1 [H+]2
Rate 3.2 × 10−3 (𝐦𝐨𝐥 𝐝𝐦−𝟑)
K = [Br −]1 [Br − ]1 [H+]2 = 0.2 0.2 (0.1)2 (𝐦𝐨𝐥 𝐝𝐦−𝟑)(𝐦𝐨𝐥 𝐝𝐦−𝟑)(𝐦𝐨𝐥 𝐝𝐦−𝟑)
3
= 8𝐦𝐨𝐥 − 𝟑 𝐝𝐦4 s-1
e) Rate = 8 (0.2)(0.2) (0.2)2
= 0.0128mol dm-3s-1
Example

2. For the reaction A + B C, the following results were obtained for kinetic run at
the same temperature.

[A](mol dm−3) [B] (mol dm−3) Initial rate (mol dm−3s−1)

0.20 0.10 0.2

0.40 0.20 0.8

0.40 0.20 0.8

Find:

a) Rate equation of reaction

b) Rate constant
c) Initial rate of reaction when [A] = 0.6moldm-3 and [B] = 0.3 moldm-3

Solution:

a) Doubling the concentration of A quadruples the rate giving order 2.

For B, doubling the concentration has no effect on rate hence zero order.
Rate = k [A]2
rate 0.20
(b) K = = (0.20)2 = 5 mol-1dm3s-1
[A]2

(c ) Rate = k [A]2[B]0

= 5[0.6]2
= 1.8 mol dm-3s-1
Exercise
1. The table below shows some data for the reactions;

[A](mol dm−3) [B] (mol dm−3) Initial rate (mol dm−3s−1)

1.00 × 10-2 2.8 × 10 -3 2.2

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 5.00 × 10-3 2.8 × 10-3 1.1

1.00 × 10-2 5.6 × 10-3 4.4

a) Determine the order of reaction with respect A and B, giving reasons for your
answers.
b) Write the rate equation of reaction
c) Calculate the rate constant and find its unit
d) Calculate the rate reaction when concentration of A and B is A = 8.5 × 10-3moldm-3,
B = 3.83 × 10-3moldm-3
2. 2 – Bromo – 2 – methylpropane, (CH3)3CBr and NaOH react together according to the
following equation
(CH3)3CBr + O H (CH3)3COH + Br –
The following data gives the results of three experiments used to determine the rate
equation from the reaction at 25OC.

Experiment Initial (CH3)3CBr Initial [𝐎H] (moldm-3) Initial rate of

(moldm-3) reaction (moldm-3)

1 1.0 × 10-3 2.0 × 10-1 3.0 × 10−3

2 4.0 ×10-3 2.0 × 10-1 6.0 × 10−3

3 5.0 ×10 -3 4.0 × 10−1 6.0 × 10 −3

From these results, it can be deduced that the rate equation is;
Rate = K [(CH3)3CBr]
i. Show how the data can be used to determine/ deduce that the reaction is 1st order with respect
to (CH3)3CBr and zero order with respect to OH.
ii. Calculate the value of the rate constant at this temperature and state its units.
iii. Calculate the initial rate of reaction when the initial concentration of (CH3)3CBr is 4.0 × 10-3
moldm-3 and the initial concentration of OH is 1.0 × 10-1 moldm-3
b) Name and outline a mechanism for the reaction of tertiary haloalkane (CH3)3CBr with
aqueous NaOH.

CLASSIFICATION OF CHEMICAL REACTIONS ACCORDING TO OVERALL

ORDER

Zero Order Reactions

 Rate of reaction is independent of the concentration of the reactant

 The rate equation for the zero order reaction is given by;
Rate = K A 0 ⟹ Rate = K (constant)
Where A is a constant in the determining step.
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 A plot of rate of reaction against concentration of reactant

Rate

Concentration of reaction
d [A]
From Rate = − = K[A]O
dt

d [A]
=− =K
dt

− d [A] =Kdt

Integrate from A0 at t = 0 to At at time t = t

At t=t
−∫A0 d[A] = K∫t=0 dt

At t=t
− [A] A0 = Kt t=0
− At – −A0) = Kt
− At + Ao = Kt
At = − Kt + A0 (y = mx + c)
A plot of concentration against time

Ao

Concentration

Slope = − K

Time (s)
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
Examples of zero order reactions

 Iodination of Propanone; in which the reaction is zero order with respect to Iodine.
 Reactions between gases; where rate of reaction with respect to one of the reactants is
zero order; indicating that this reactant has been adsorbed on the surface of the vessel
and the rate only depends on the frequency of collision between the non adsorbed gas
with the inside of the vessel e.g. decomposition of NH3 (g) to Nitrogen and Hydrogen in
the presence of a hot tungsten wire.

Experiment: To determine order of reactions with respect to Iodine in the Iodination of

propanone catalysed by H2SO4

Procedure:

− Fixed volumes of propanone and sulphuric acid are measured into a clean flask.
− A fixed volume of standard solution of iodine is then added to the flask. The time at which
the iodine is added is being noted.
− After a few minutes, a sample of the reacting mixture is pipetted into a conical flask and
added a solution of Sodium hydrogen Carbonate solution to stops the reaction instantly by
neutralizing the acid.
− The time at which the reaction stops is noted.
− The resultant mixture is then titrated with a standard solution of Sodium thiosulphite to
determine the amount of Iodine that remains.
− The procedure is repeated at intervals of 5 minutes to determine the amount of Iodine that has
remained.
− Initial concentration of iodine is determined
− Since titre values at various times will be proportional to the concentration of iodine left at
those times, a plot of volume of thiosulphite against the time elapsed since the start of
reaction, gives a straight line from which the value of rate constant(K) can be determined.

A plot of volume of Sodium thiosulphite against time

Volume of
Sodium
thiosulphite

Time(s)

Rate of the reaction remains constant as the iodine concentration decreases.

Example (QUIZ)

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
a) Describe an experiment to show Iodination of Propanone follows a zero order reaction with
respect to Iodine. (7mks)
b) Propanone reacts with Iodine in the presence of an acid catalyst according to the equation

H+
CH3COCH3 (aq) + I2 (aq) CH3COCH2I + HI (aq)
The reaction is first order with respect to Propanone and independent of the concentration of
Iodine. Briefly describe how the order of reaction with respect to Iodine can be determined.

2. First Order Reactions

 Rate of reaction is proportional to the first power of concentration of single reactants.

 Consider a reaction, A products
−
d[A] 1
Rate = dt = K [A]
Rate = k [A], from y = mx + c, c = 0
A graph of rate against concentration of reactants

Rate

Slope = K

Concentration of reactant

Examples of first order reactions

 Hydrolysis of sucrose in presence of acid.

 Acid catalysed hydrolysis of an ester.
 Radioactive decay
 Decomposition of nitrogen pentaoxide, N2O5
 Decomposition of Benzene diazonium chloride.

Radioactive decay and half life

Half life:

Is the time taken for the concentration to fall to half its original value.
d[A]
Rate of reaction = − = K [A]
dt

Separating variables;

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 d[A]
− = 𝐾 dt
[A]

Integrating between the limits Ao at times t = 0 to At at t = t

At d[A] t=t
− ∫Ao = k ∫t=0 dt
[A]

At t=t
− In[A] Ao
= kt t=0

− In At – (− InA0) = kt

Ao
In = kt
At

Ao
But In = 2.303log10 ⟹ 2.303 log = kt --------- (i)
At
Ao
At t = t ½ ; At = 2
Ao
2.303log Ao = kt ½
2
0.693
t ½ = 2.303log 2 = K
0.693
∴ t½ = --------------------------- (ii)
K
For 1st order reactions, half life is constant and independent of the initial concentration of the reactant.
A graph of concentration of A against time

Ao
Conc. of A
Ao
2

Ao
4

0 t½ 2t ½ Time (s)
First order reaction (t ½ − 0) = (2t ½ − t ½ )
Ao
Also from 2.303log At = kt

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 Ao kt
⟹ Log = 2.303
At

𝐀𝐨
A plot of against time
𝐀𝐭

Ao
Log At

K
Slope = 2.303

Time (s)
Ao K
Also from log = 2.303
At

K
log Ao – log At = 2.303
K
log At = log Ao − 2.303

Ao
K
Slope = − 2.303

log At

Time(s)

UNEB 2011

1. The table below shows the kinetic data that was obtained for the conversion of sucrose to
glucose in acid solution.

Conc. of sucrose (mol dm−3) 0.08 0.06 0.04 0.02 0.01

Rate of reaction (moldm−3) 0.004 0.003 0.002 0.001 0.0005

i. Plot a graph of rate of reaction against the concentration of sucrose.

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 ii. State the order of the reaction. Give a reason for your answer.
iii. Determine the rate constant for the reaction and indicate its units.
iv. Calculate the rate of the reaction when the concentration of sucrose was 0.12moldm−3.
2. Compound B undergoes a reaction to form compound W. The course of the reaction can be
followed by adding excess KI solution to a fixed volume of the reactant. B reacts with a
standard solution of Sodium thiosulphate. The volume of the Sodium thiosulphite solution is
a measure of the concentration of B remaining at time T. The table below shows the volume
of Sodium thiosulphite, V required at various times.

V(cm3) 24.70 17.80 12.90 9.25 5.50 3.60

t (mins) 0 60 120 180 240 300

a) Plot a graph of V against time

b) From the graph in (a), deduce the time for B; to
i. be reduced to half the original value
1
ii. be reduced to 4 the original value
c) What is the order of the reaction with respect to B?
d) Write the rate equation for the reaction in which B is converted to W.
e) Determine the rate constant for the reaction.
NB: When only time and the concentration of the product is given, the concentration of the
reactant at each time is got by subtracting the concentration of the product at that time from the
concentration of the product at the end of the reaction. i.e.

[Reactants]t = [product]end – [product]t

A plot of the concentration of reactant and time is then made e.g. given;

W + H2O products

Time(s) 0 20 40 60 ∞

[products]/moldm3 30 90 120 135 150

Solution:

Time (s) 0 20 40 60 ∞

[Product] (moldm-3) 30 90 120 135 150

[reactant] (moldm-3) (150 − 30) (150− 90) (150− 120) (150− 135) (150− 150)

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 120 60 30 15 0

Experimental determination of order of catalyzed decomposition of H2O2

Procedure:

 A known fixed volume of H2O2 solution is pipette.

 NaOH solution is added to it followed by FeCl3 solution and the stop clock simultaneously
started.
 Mixture is shaken and allowed to stand for 3 minutes.
 A known volme reaction mixture is withdrawn, excess dilute H2SO4 is added to it stop the
decomposition.
 The resultant mixture is then titrated with a standard solution of KMnO4 .
 The procedure is repeated at intervals of 3 minutes before adding H2SO4 and the titre values
Vt noted.
 Initial concentration of H2O2 before decomposition is obtained by titrating the original H2O2,
with KMnO4 and volume of the potassium permanganate used Vo is recorded.
𝐕𝐨
 A graph of log ( 𝐕𝐭 ) against time is plotted, a straight line is obtained.

Treatment of results:

Volume of Vo
3
KMnO4 (cm ) OR log Vt

Time (s) Time (s)

𝐕𝐨 k
log Slope = 2.303
𝐕𝐭

Time (s)

UNEB 2011

1. Describe an experiment to show that catalytic decomposition of H2O2 is a first order reaction.
2. A certain volume of H2O2 solution was decomposed in the presence of platinum. The amount
of H2O2 after time t was found by withdrawing aliquot portions of solution, adding dilute

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 sulphuric acid and titrating with Potassium manganate (VII) solution. The volume Vt of
Potassium manganate (VII) solution were as follows;

t (min) 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45

Vt (cm3) 12.30 9.20 6.90 5.20 3.90 2.90 2.20 1.60 1.20 1.15

i. Tabulate values of log Vt

ii. Plot a graph of log Vt against time
iii. State order of reaction with respect hydrogen peroxide. Give reason for your answer.
iv. Determine the rate constant for the reaction
v. Calculate the half life for the reaction

NB: Conditions for first order reaction

 If one of the reactants is in large excess that only a small fraction of it will be used up in the
reaction.
 Use of acid as catalyst; where its concentration doesn‟t change during the course of the
reaction e.g acid catalysed hydrolysis of esters and sucrose.

3. SECOND ORDER REACTION

Rate of reaction is proportional to the ,

 products of the concentration of reactants each raised to power one

 square of the concentration of a single reactant.
For A Products , rate = k[A]2
For A + B Products, Rate = k[A]1 [B]1
Graphs of second order reactions

Rate of Rate of
Rxn rxn

Concentration of reactant concentration

Half life:

For second order reactions, half life is inversely proportional to the concentration. i.e . It almost
doubles for every successive decrease in concentration of the reactant by half.
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
Concentration Ao b>a

A½

A¼

a b Time

Examples of 2nd order reactions

− Hydrolysis of ethyl ethanoate by aqueous NaOH

− Oxidation of I− to I2 by H2O2

FACTORS AFFECTING RATES OF REACTION

These include

i. Concentration of reactants in solution

ii. Temperature
iii. Pressure of gaseous reactants
iv. Light
v. Catalyst
vi. Surface area/size of particle of a solid reactant.

Surface area:

− For reactions involving solids, breaking the solid into smaller pieces increases its total
surface area.
− Increase in SA of the reactants increases the rate of reaction by exposing more
reactant molecules to react with another.

Light;

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 − Photosensitive reactions e.g. photosynthesis and formation of Ag and Ag salts which
take place when a photographic film is exposed to light, their rates increase with
exposure to light.
− Light of sufficient energy breaks the bonds in one of the reactants creating a reactive
intermediate from which the products are formed.

Pressure of gaseous reactants:

Increase in pressure of gases pushes the gaseous molecules close together; increasing on their
frequency of collision and thus reacting more rapidly.

Concentration;

− Increasing the concentration of the reactants increases the rate of reaction and vice
versa
− This is because at greater concentration, there are more molecules in a given volume,
close distance between these molecules are reduced and there is an increased number
of collisions per unit volume.

Example:

1. The rate equation for 2A + B C is given by Rate = k[A] [B]2 . How will the rate of
reaction alter if concentration of
i. A is doubled but concentration of B is kept constant
ii. Concentration of B is halved but concentration of A is kept constant
iii. Both Concentration of A and concentration of B are doubled

Solution:

i. Rate = k[A] [B]2

= k[2A] [B]2
= 2k [A] [B]2
New rate is twice the initial rate
ii. Rate = k[A] [½B]2
= ½ 2 k [A] B 2
= ¼ k [A] [B]2
New rate is ¼ times the initial rate
iii. From Rate = k[A] [B]2
Rate = k [2A] [2B]2
= (2)(4) k[A] [B]2
= 8 k[A] [B]2
new rate is 8 times the initial rate

ACTIVITY

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 The rate of a certain reaction is Rate = k[A] [B]2 [C] where [ ] is the concentration in moles per
litre and k is the rate constant. State how the rate of the reaction will change if;

i. Concentration of B and C is doubled and A is kept constant

ii. Concentration of A and C were kept constant and concentration of B is halved
iii. [A] and [C] were kept constant and [B] was doubled.
iv. Concentration of A, B and C were doubled.

Temperature:

− Increasing the temperature of the reactants increases the rate of a reaction.

− At higher temperatures, the ions/ molecules of the reactants have more energy moving
with greater average velocity and collide more frequently and with more force.
− Increased collision frequency results in a higher rate of reaction.

MAXWELL – BOLTZMANN DISTRIBUTION OF MOLECULAR ENERGY,E

 Maxwell – Boltzmann stated that; Rate of reaction doubles for every 100C/10k rise in
temperature as shown below.

A plot of fraction of number of molecules with energy E against molecular energy E

T1 T2 > T1 no of molecules with Energy ≥ Ea

No. of
Molecules with Ea No of molecules with energy ≤ Ea
Energy, E T2

Molecular energy,E

Interpretation

 At lower temperature (T1), a very large fraction of the molecules have energy close to the
average energy, only a very small fraction of the molecules having very high or very low
energies.
 At higher temperature (T2), there is a wide range of molecular energies; proportion of
molecules with energy greater than or equal to average is greater; increasing the
likelihood of successive collision increasing the rate of reaction.
Qn: Explain with the help of Maxwell - distribution diagram why the rate of some reactions
approximately doubles when the temperature is increased by 100C around room temperature.

Relationship between the rate constant, K and temperature

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
  Arrhenius equation relates the magnitude of the rate constant and the temperature
 The equation can be used to calculate the activation energy from the rates of reactions at
different temperatures.
−Ea
K = Ae RT

Ea
InK = InA − RT

Where A = Arrhenius factor (pre exponential factor)

K = Rate constant
Ea = Activation energy
T = absolute temperature
R = Gas constant

A plot of 𝐥𝐧 𝐊 against temperature

ln A
−Ea
ln K Slope = R

1
(K −1 )
Temp

𝐄𝐚
A Plot of log K against 𝟏 𝐓 (log K = log A − )
𝟐.𝟑𝟎𝟑 𝐑𝐓

log A

log K
𝐄𝐚
Slope = − 𝟐.𝟑𝟎𝟑 𝐑

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 1
(K −1 )
T

 If K1 is the rate constant at temperature T1 and K2 is the rate constant at temperature T2

Ea
From ln K = ln A − RT

K1 → T1, K2 → T2
Ea
ln K1 = ln A − RT 1 ------------------------ (i)

Ea
ln K2 = ln A − RT 2 ------------------------ (ii)

(i) – (ii)
Ea Ea
ln K1 − ln K2 = − RT 1 − − RT 2

K1 Ea Ea
ln K2 = −
RT 2 RT 1

𝐊𝟏 𝐄𝐚 𝐓𝟏−𝐓𝟐
⟹ 𝐥𝐧 = ___________________ (i)
𝐊𝟐 𝐑 𝐓𝟐𝐓𝟏

OR
𝐊𝟐 𝐄𝐚 𝐓𝟐−𝐓𝟏
𝐥𝐧 = ___________________ (ii)
𝐊𝟏 𝐑 𝐓𝟐𝐓𝟏

But ln = 2.303 log10

𝐊𝟏 𝐄𝐚 𝐓𝟏 −𝐓𝟐
𝐥𝐨𝐠 =
𝐊𝟐 𝟐.𝟑𝟎𝟑𝐑 𝐓𝟐 𝐓𝟏

𝐄𝐱𝐚𝐦𝐩𝐥𝐞

1. The activation energy for a certain reaction is 50kJmol-1. What is the effect on the rate
constant of increasing the temperature by 10K around room temperature (assumed to be 150C
)

Solution:

T1 = (15 + 273) = 288K

T2 = 288 + 10 = 298K
𝐊 𝐄𝐚 𝐓𝟐 −𝐓𝟏
From log 𝐊𝟐 = 𝟐.𝟑𝟎𝟑𝐑
𝟏 𝐓𝟐 𝐓𝟏

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 K 5000 298 −288
log K 2 = 2.303 ×8.314
1 298∙288

K
log K 2 = 0.30426871
1

K2
= log −1 (0.30426871) = 2.0149
K1

𝐊𝟐
≈2
𝐊𝟏

The final rate is twice the initial rate

ACTIVITY

The rate 2N2O5 2N2O4 (g) + O2 (g) was studied at various temperatures and the rate
constants were determined at those temperatures as shown in the table below.

Temp o C 20 35 45 65

Rate constant 1.76 × 10−4 1.35 × 10−4 4.94 × 10−4 4.87 × 10−3

Calculate the activation energy Ea for the reaction.

Vi) Catalyst:

 Is a substance that alters the rate of chemical reaction but remains chemically unchanged
at the end of the reaction.
 They speed up the rate of chemical reaction by providing an alternative route of lower
activation energy from reactants to products

Reaction profile of uncatalysed and catalysed reactions

Potential Path of uncatalysed reaction

Energy Activation energy of uncatalysed reaction

Reactant Path of catalysed reaction

Ea of catalysed reaction
Products

Reaction coordinate

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 UNEB 2012 (5) d

i. Using the same axis, draw a labeled diagram for energy – reaction coordinate for a catalysed
and uncatalysed. reactions
ii. State the difference in your diagrams
iii. State how a catalyst increases the rate of a reaction.

Classification of catalyst

Classified according to the physical state it is in compared to the reactant namely.

a) Heterogeneous catalyst
b) Homogenous catalyst
a) Heterogeneous catalyst
 Catalysts and reacting substances are in different states
 Examples include.
i. Using of Fe in the Haber Process
ii. Nickel catalyst in the in the hardening of vegetable oils in the production of
Margarine.
iii. Vanadium (v) oxide in the contact process
𝐕𝟐 𝐎𝟓 (𝐬)
2SO2 (g) + O2(g) SO3(g)

Heterogeneous catalyst takes place at the surface of the Catalyst.

Reactants are adsorbed onto the surface of the catalyst, bonds are broken and new bonds formed.
The products are desorbed from the surface

b) Homogenous catalyst
 Catalyst and reacting substances are in the same physical states. E.g. include
i. Acid catalysed hydrolysis
ii. Peroxidase enzyme in the mammalian liver.
iii. Use of Aq. CoCl2 in the reaction between H2O2 and aqueous solution of Sodium –
Potassium 2, 3 – dihydroxybutandioate.

Features of Catalysts

i. Very specific to a single reaction or to class of very similar reactions.

ii. Catalyse both forward and backward reaction at the same extent and therefore have no effect
on equilibrium constant or equilibrium position.
iii. Small quantities can usually achieve a huge increase in rate of reaction.
iv. Catalyst maybe poisoned by some other substances e.g. lead, Arsenic and cyanide.

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
Determination of a mechanism of a reaction

 Reaction mechanism is a detailed step by step description of the pathways followed by

reactants in forming products.
 It specifies all intermediate stages and all intermediate species formed.

Examples;

i. Hydrolysis of primary alkyl halide.

 The reaction is first order with respect to Hydroxyl ion and also first order with
respect Bromoethane ; giving an overall order of 2.

Equation:

CH3CH2Br + NaOH CH3CH2OH + NaBr

Mechanism:

NaOH (aq) Na+ (aq) + OH (aq)

HO
fast
CH2 Br ⇄ HO − −CH2 − −Br +
HOCH2CH3 +Br-

CH3 CH3

Reactants activated complex products

Rate = K [OH] [CH3 CH2Br]

Reaction profile for substitution Nucleophilic (SN2)

+
Activated complex 𝐇𝐎 − −𝐂𝐇𝟐 − −𝐁𝐫 −

CH3
Potential
Energy

CH3CH2OH + 𝐎 𝐇

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 ∆H
CH3CH2OH + Br
NB:
Activated complex is an “unstable intermediate in which bonds of the reactant molecules are
partially breaking while the new bonds of the product molecules are partially being formed.”

ii. Hydrolysis of tertially alkyl halides (2 – Bromo – 2 – methyl propane)

Equation:

(CH3)3C – Br (CH3)3 C+ + Br−

Fast
(CH3)3C+ (CH3)3C – OH

OH Product

𝐑𝐞𝐚𝐜𝐭𝐢𝐨𝐧 𝐩𝐫𝐨𝐟𝐢𝐥𝐞 of substitution Nucleophilic Unimolecular (SN1)

iii. Oxidation of Iodide to Iodine by H2O2

H2O2 (aq) + 2I−(aq) + 2H3O+ (aq) I2(aq) + 4H2O(l)

Mechanism

slow
i. H2O2 (aq) + I−(aq) ⇄ IO−(aq) + H2O(l)

Fast
ii. IO− (aq) + H3O+(aq) ⇄ HIO (aq) + H2O (l)
Fast
iii. HIO (aq) + I−(aq) H3O+ I2(aq) + 2H2O(l)
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 Rate = K [H2O2] I Overall order = 2

Questions (UNEB 1999 QN 14)

1. 2 – Bromo – 2- methyl propane reacts with aqueous NaOH to form 2 – methyl – propan – 2 –
ol
a) Write the rate equation for the reaction.
b) Draw an energy diagram for the reaction
Write the mechanism for the reaction
c) State the;
i. Rate determining step of the reaction
ii. Technique which was used to study the reaction
2. Bromo – methane reacts with aqueous NaOH according to the following equations
CH3Br + OH (aq) CH3OH (aq) + Br –(aq) ∆H = −VE.
The overall order is 2
a) Draw a fully labeled diagram of energy versus reaction pathway for the reaction.
b) Explain what is meant by the term activated complex.
i. Write the rate equation for the reaction
ii. Outline a mechanism for the reaction.

NOTE:
 Transition state is a state of maximum potential energy during a chemical reaction in
which the substance present at that state can now form the products of the reaction or
can give back the reactants.
 Activation energy is the minimum energy which colliding molecules need in order to
react forming products.

Assignment
Theories of reaction rates
 Collision theory( Ramsden, 287-290, 307-308; understanding chem., 165-166)
 Transition state theory(Ramsden, 308-310; understanding chem.; 166-167)

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 PHASE EQUILIBRIUM
Is the study of conditions under which different phases are in equilibrium.

Common terms:

a) Phase:
 Is a homogenous and physically distinct part of a system separated from other parts of
the system by definite boundary surfaces e.g.,
i. Water system containing 3 phases (ice, liquid water and water vapour)
ii. Mixture of chloroform and water owing to immiscibility constitutes two phases
iii. Mixture of gases due to diffusion constitutes a single phase.
b) Boundary:
 Is a physical part of a system separating the different phases e.g. in water system
liquid – vapour interface, solid – liquid interface, solid- vapour interface are in
boundaries.
c) Component:
 Refers to a single pure substance e.g. water
d) Phase diagram:
A graphical plot of the effects of various temperatures and pressures on phase equilibria.
In a phase diagram;
 a phase is represented by a region separated from each other regions by lines or
curves.
 Lines or curves represent a condition under which a phase can exist.

PHASE DIAGRAMS OF SINGLE PURE SUBSTANCES

(a). Water
218 C B

Water or liquid
Pressure (atmosphere)

1.0 Y X

Ice or solid

O
Water vapour or gas
A

Temperature (℃) 100 374

POINTS
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 O: Triple point of water
 At this point, pure ice, liquid and vapour are in equilibrium or co- exist

B; Critical point of water; (corresponds to critical temperature)

 Critical temperature is the temperature above which vapour cannot be converted into
liquid water no matter how much pressure is exerted.
 Beyond this temperature, the vapour and liquid become indistinguishable.

X on OB; Boiling point of water;

 Liquid water and water vapour are in equilibrium at 100OC and a pressure of one
atmosphere.
Y on C; Freezing point of water;

 Ice is in equilibrium with water at a temperature of 273K (0OC) and the pressure of 1
atmosphere.

CURVES

AO; Vapour pressure curve of ice (sublimation curve)

 Describes the effect of the temperature on saturated vapour pressure of ice.

OB; VP curve of liquid water (Vaporisation curve)

 Shows variation of vapour pressure of water in equilibrium with its vapour with
temperature.

OC; Melting temperature/ Freezing temperature curve of ice (Fusion curve of ice)

 Slopes towards the pressure axis indicating that melting point of ice is lowered by
increasing in pressure. (Formation of ice is favoured)

(b). Carbon dioxide

C
B
Pressure (atmosphere)

Solid liquid

5.11
O

1.0 A Vapour
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 NB; 195 217 Temperature(K)

Phase diagram for CO2 is similar to that of water with two notable exceptions;
 Triple point lies much above 1 atmosphere.
At all pressures below its triple point, if solid carbon dioxide is warmed it sublimes.
 Curve OC slopes towards the right or away from the pressure axis.
Molecules of CO2 in the solid phase are packed more closely than in liquid phase
where unlike water, Solid CO2 is denser than the liquid i.e. increase in pressure
favours formation of liquid.
Melting points of solid CO2 is increased with increase in pressure.
(c) Sulphur system:
 Exhibits allotropy (existence of an element in more than one crystalline form)
 Exists in two allotropic forms; Alpha sulphur which has a rhombic crystalline form
and Beta Sulphur which has a monoclinic crystalline form.
 Sulphur molecules, S8 in rhombic sulphur are more densely packed than in the
monoclinic sulphur.
 Sulphur exhibits enantiotropy (when an element can exist in two or more
allotropic forms each of which is stable over a range of conditions.
 Monoclinic suphur is stable above 95.60C until a temperature of 1190C when it melts.
 On cooling, monoclinic sulphur changes to rhombic sulphur at 95.60C.
 Temperature at which the two forms are in equilibrium is called the transition
temperature and its 95.60C.
Rhombic sulphur ⇌ Monoclinic sulphur
Stable < 95.60C Stable > 95.60C
G
F

Monoclinic suphur
Pressure (atmosphere)

Rhombic sulphur D(critical point)

Liquid sulphur

E C(triple point)
B

A Vapour
368.6 387 392 717.6 Temperature(K)
POINTS
B; Transition temperature (368.6K); Rhombic sulphur changes to monoclinic sulphur
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 C; Melting point of monoclinic sulphur (1190C)
F; Equilibrium point between Rhombic sulphur, monoclinic sulphur and liquid sulphur.

CURVES
AB;
 Sublimation curve of Rhombic sulphur:
 Shows the Vapour Pressure of Rhombic sulphur at various temperatures.
BC;
 Sublimation curve of monoclinic sulphur
 Shows variation of vapour pressure of monoclinic sulphur in equilibrium with its
vapour with temperature.
CD;
 Vaporistaion curve of liquid sulphur
 Shows variation of vapour pressure of liquid sulphur in equilibrium with its vapour
with temperature.
CF;
 Fusion curve of monoclinic sulphur.
 Shows variation of melting point of monoclinic sulphur with pressure.
BF;
 Transition curve;
 Shows the effect of pressure on the transition point
FG;
 melting point/ fusion curve of rhombic sulphur.
 Shows variation of melting point of rhombic sulphur with pressure.
 Slants towards the right signifying that the melting point of rhombic sulphur increases
with temperature.

NB:

 Curves BG and CG slope to the right indicating the melting points of monoclinic and
rhombic sulphur increase with pressure.
 When sulphur is rapidly heated, melting occurs without conversion into monoclinic
sulphur.
 When it is slowly heated, it changes slowly from rhombic to monoclinic sulphur at
95.50C and then converts to liquid sulphur at 1190C and finally to vapour at 4440C

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 QUESTIONS UNEB 1999 P2 (No. 17)
1. The figure below is a phase diagram for a certain substance;

Pressure Solid A
(atmosphere)s

X. Solid Z
B
temperature

a) Label the following on the diagram;

i. Axes (ii) Phases present (iii) Critical point (iv) Triple point
b) Define the following terms
i. Critical temperature (ii) Triple point
c) Explain what would happen when the substance at point X changes to point B

Solution (part c).

 Gradual decrease in pressure in X; solid A changes to solid Z and pressure drops

below solid Z vapour line and solid z changes to vapour B.
2. The diagram below shows Variation of Vapour pressure with temperature of a pure
substance. B

pressure(mmHg)
R C
A O
Q

Temperature(℃)

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 (a) (i) On the diagram indicate the different phases of the substance
(ii)State what happens at O
(b). High pressure was applied at the constant temperature to the phase at Q. Describe the
changes that took place.
(c) The temperature of the phase at point R was increased at constant pressure. State what was
observed.(ANS. Volume of the vapour decreases until a point on the curve OC,when it
starts to turn into liquid)
SOLIDIFICATION OF SOLUTION
Common terms

i) Eutectic mixture
o Is a liquid mixture of two or more substances which at constant pressure will solidify
at constant temperature below the freezing point of the components in it forming a
heterogeneous solid of the same composition as the liquid mixture.
ii) Eutectic temperature:
o Is the constant temperature at which a liquid mixture of two or more components
solidifies at a given pressure without change in composition.

A. Solidification of a mixture of two liquids without compound formation

 Tin and lead mixture, Silver and lead mixture, Lead and Antimony, Zinc and
Cadmium, Bromomethane and Benzene mixture, Camphor and Naphthalene, Copper
and Zinc etc

TIN AND LEAD SYSTEM

 Pure tin will melt on heating and solidify on cooling at a temperature of 2320C
 Pure lead will melt on heating and solidify on cooling at a temperature of 3270C
 Addition of a little Lead to a molten Tin will lower the melting point/ freezing point of
Tin such that on cooling, pure Tin will separate out as a solid.
 Freezing point of Tin will be lowered as more and more lead is added; more and more
Tin separates out until finally a solid mixture of Tin and Lead separates out.
 The reverse is true i.e. as Tin is added to molten Lead

Temperature composition diagram for a Tin lead mixture

B
Liquid solid lead +liquid
A Mixture of lead+ tin
Temperature Temperature
Solid tin+liquid
Mixture of Sn
and Pb E
C solid tin and solid lead D
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
POINTS 100% Tin mass (%) 100% Lead
A; Melting point of Tin
0% Lead 0% Tin
B: Melting / freezing point of Lead
E; Eutectic point (point at which solid Tin and Lead separate)

CURVES
AE:
Shows how the freezing point in Tin is lowered by adding Lead
BE:
Shows how the freezing point of Lead is lowered by addition of Sn

Questions

1. The sketch shows a phase diagram of substance X and Y which shows a simple Eutectic
mixture. Q

Temperature Temperature
(0℃) 250 w N
M
O (0℃)
75 E 75
P

100% X 40% 100 Y

a) Which one is the eutectic point?

b) Identify the following regions
i. M (ii) P (iii) N (iv) O
c) Explain what happens when a mixture corresponding to the composition at Q is cooled.
SOLUTION (part c)
 Q cools up to 250℃ without change in phase.
 At 250℃ and below; solid X begins to separate out from the mixture.
 As the mixture is cooled further, more and more X crystalise out of the mixture, until
a temperature of 75℃ , where solid X and solid Y are formed.
 Any further cooling below 75℃ , will give the eutectic mixture( solid X and solid Y)

ACTIVITY

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 1. Two components A and B form an Eutectic mixture in which the freezing temperature of
A and B and the Eutectic mixture are 3200C, 2600C and 1400C respectively.

a) Using the above data, sketch a well labeled diagram of the system, assuming the eutectic
mixture forms at 50% A
b) Explain what happens if a mixture at 40% B is cooled to room temperature, 250C

2. a) Naphthalene – biphenyl system forms an Eutectic mixture at 410C.

The Eutectic mixture contains 0.47 moles fraction of Naphthalene. The melting points of
various compositions of Naphthalene system are shown in the table below.

Mole fraction of 0.125 0.275 0.625 0.800

Naphthalene
Melting point (0C) 63.0 53.0 54.0 64.0

(i). Draw an accurate phase diagram for Naphthalene – Biphenyl system and label all the
regions of the diagram (melting point of Naphthalene ,860C, Melting point of biphenyl
,710C)
(ii).Explain what would happen if a liquid mixture containing 80% Naphthalene was
gradually cooled.

COOLING CURVES OF A PURE SUBSTANCE

A
Cooling of hot liquid
Temperature ℃

Plateau where crystal of pure component begins forming

C Solid component fully formed

.(cooling curve for solid)
B
supercooling D
Time(minutes)
NB: Super cooling is the cooling below the freezing point without crystal formation.

COOLING CURVE OF A MIXTURE

A Cooling of hot liquid mixture
Freezing B
temperature℃

point slowing down of the rate of cooling of the liquid

plateau where crystals of both components are formed.

eutectic C D
mixture
fformation
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HODE at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .

Time in minutes
COMPARISON BETWEEN EUTECTIC MIXTURE AND A COMPOUND
(a) Similarities
 Have fixed melting points at constant atmospheric pressures
 Have similar cooling curves
(b) Differences
Eutectic mixtures Compound

 Can be separated by physical means  Separated by chemical means

 Composition varies with pressure  Composition doesn‟t vary with
pressure
 Properties are simply the sum of  Properties are completely different
properties of its components from those of the components in it
 Is heterogeneous  Is homogenous
QN: Mention three tests that can be carried out on a eutectic mixture to show that it is not a pure
compound.
 Microscopy shows a heterogenous mixture of separate distinct crystals that make up
the mixture.
 X-ray diffraction pattern does not conform to a pure compound.
 Melting point and composition of eutectic mixture change with pressure.
 Composition of eutectic does not correspond to any known compound e.g Calcium-
magnesium system.

APLLICATION OF EUTECTICS.
Used in ;
 formation of alloys e.g. solder which is used for joining other metals at temperatures
which are not so high to melt the pure metal.
 Industries where it is desirable to lower the melting point of a substance e.g.
(i).Extraction of Aluminium from the bauxite (Al2O3), cryolite is added to lower the
melting point.
(ii)Extraction of Sodium, Calcium chloride is added to Sodium chloride to lower its
melting point from 8000C to 6000C.
 Used as safety appliances such as plugs.

SALT−WATER SYSTEM
 If a dilute solution of KI is cooled below 00C, pure ice will form when the freezing point of
the solution is reached. Its freezing point will be less than 00C, because the added KI lowers
the freezing point of water.

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
  As ice is formed, the solution becomes more concentrated so that its freezing point becomes
lower still with more ice deposited.
 -230C (Eutectic
At Temperature temperature
composition ), the solution
diagram becomes
for KI – water more saturated and any further
system
cooling deposits a mixture of ice and solid KI, temperature remaining constant until the
whole system solidifies.

 A
If a concentrated solutionsolution
of KI cooled, crystals of B
pure KI will be deposited until a temperature
0
Temperature ℃

of –023 C, when a mixture of both ice and KIKIcrystallizes

+ solutionout at constant temperature.

temperature℃
Solid
Ice+ solution
23
Solid KI+ ice C

0 20 40 60 80 100
Pure water mass% pure KI

POINT
A: Melting point of ice / freezing point of water
C Eutectic point
 Corresponds to lowest temperature which must be reached before the whole system
solidifies.
 Three phases are in equilibrium, ice, KI and solution and there is no compound formation.
 Crystals deposited from the solution have the same composition as the solution mixture, and
is called eutectic mixture or the cryohydric mixture

CURVES:
AC
 Describes the way the freezing point of water is lowered by addition of KI.
BC
 Solubility curve of KI in water
 Steep rise shows that solubility of KI increases slowly with increase in temperature.

Questions:
a) Define the term eutectic mixture
b) The table shows the melting points of various mixtures of Lead and Tin.

%Tin 0 20 40 70 80 100

Melting point (0C) 327 280 234 193 206 232

i. Draw a fully labeled diagram for a Tin and Lead system

ii. Determine the eutectic temperature and the composition of the eutectic mixture
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
c) Describe changes that could take place when a liquid mixture of the above system containing
40%. Tin is cooled from 4000C to 1000C.
d) (i) State one application of Tin- Lead eutectic mixture
(ii) Name one other pair of metals which can give a similar phase diagram as in b (i)
(iii) State one similarity between a eutectic mixture and a pure metal.
THERMOCHEMISTRY/THERMODYNAMICS.

Thermochemistry is the study of energy changes accompanying chemical reactions.

During chemical reactions, energy is absorbed to break the bonds between atoms and energy is
given out when new bonds are formed.

Thermochemistry investigates the position of equilibrium in the reaction, feasibility of the

reaction and how far the reaction can go.

TYPES OF CHEMICAL REACTIONS

Chemical reactions are grouped according to whether heat is gained/ lost during the reaction.

iii. Endothermic reactions

 Are reactions which proceed with absorption of heat from the surrounding.
 It is denoted with a positive enthalpy change
 Products are at a higher energy level than the reactants

Energy level diagram for endothermic reactions

Potential Energy

( kJmol-1) H2 Products

∆H = +ve

H1 Reactants

Reaction coordinate
Examples of endothermic reactions include;

 Photosynthesis
 Dissolution of Ammonium nitrate in water
 Change of state e.g. vaporization and melting

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 iv. Exothermic reactions
 Are reactions which proceed with evolution of heat to the surrounding
 Denoted with a negative enthalpy change
 Products are at a lower energy level than the reactants

Energy level diagram for an exothermic reaction

Potential energy

(kJmol−1)

H1 reactants

∆H = negative

H2

Reaction coordinate

Examples include

 Dissolution of Sulphric Acid in water

 Combustion
 Change of state eg freezing and condensation
 Thermit reaction i.e. reduction of Fe2O3 by aluminium

ENTHALPY (H)
Is the energy or heat content of a substance

Enthalpy change (∆H)

Is the quantity of heat absorbed at constant pressure.
Enthalpy change = Enthalpy of products – enthalpy of reactant

∆H = H2− H1
Where H2 = enthalpy of products
H1 = enthalpy of reactants

STANDARD ENTHALPY CHANGE (∆Hθ)

Is the heat change when molar quantities of reactants in their standard states react to give
products.
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
NB: Standard state of the substance is the pure substance in the specified state (solid, liquid or
gas) at 1 atmosphere and 298K.
The values of enthalpy change depend on;
v. Temperature at which reaction is taking place
vi. Pressure of the gaseous reactants and products
vii. Physical state of reactants (solid, liquid or gas)
viii. Amount of reactants and products

TYPES OF ENTHALPY CHANGES

c) Standard enthalpy change of formation (∆𝐇𝐟𝛉 )
Is the enthalpy change that occurs when one mole of a substance is formed from its elements
in their normal physical state at standard temperature and pressure (stp)
e.g. Al(s) + 3 2O2 (g) → Al2O3 (s) ∆Hfθ (298K) = −1676 KJmol-1
Enthalpy of formation of substances are always negative and cannot be measured
experimentally but are determined indirectly using the Born Haber cycle.
Standard enthalpy of formation of elements at standard conditions are equal to zero.
Standard enthalpy of formation is related to the stability of substances i.e. the more negative
the value of standard enthalpy change of formation, the more stable the compound will be
and the positive value of ∆Hfθ indicates that the compound is likely to be thermally unstable
or may not form at all.

d) Standard enthalpy change of combustion ∆𝐇𝐜𝛉 )

Is the enthalpy change that occurs when one mole of a substance is completely burnt in O2 under
standard conditions of temperature and pressure (STP) e.g. heat of combustion of Carbon.

C(s) + O2 (g) ⟶ CO2 (g) ∆Hcθ = − 393KJmol−1

Experiment: To determine enthalpy of combustion of a substance

Setup:

Electric current

Thermometer

Stirrer

Bomb crucible containing

Calorimeter substance
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 Water
Procedure:

 A known mass of substance is placed in a crucible suspended in a bomb calorimeter.

 The bomb calorimeter is then filled with O2 at a pressure of 25 atmospheres and increased in
a calorimeter fitted with thermometer and stirrer containing a fixed volume of water.
 The initial temperature of the water is noted. T10C and then the substance is heated by
passing electric current through the platinum wire in contact with it.
 Substance burns and the heat generated raises the temperature of H2O.
 Maximum temperature T20C of water is then noted.

Results:

 Let m be the mass of water in grams

w be mass of substance in grams
Mr be the RMM of substance
Temperature rise (T20C − T10C) = ∆T
C the specific heat capacity of water
P heat produced by heater

Treatment of results:

Assumption:

 Neglecting the heat gained by the calorimeter, then heat evolved by burning the substance
and heat produced by the heater is equal to the heat gained by water.
Heat evolved by substance and heater = heat absorbed by water
Heat absorbed by water = mc∆T J
Heat evolved by substance = (mc∆T − P)
Wg of substance evolves (mc∆T − P) J
Mr will evolve (mc ∆T−P
W
)
× Mr

Expt: To determine enthalpy of combustion of ethanol

Setup:

Thermometer
Stirrer
Calorimeter

water

Heat shield
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 Burner

Ethanol

Procedure:

 A known amount of cold water is weighed into a calorimeter.

 The initial temperature of the cold water is determined, T0OC
 Some ethanol is added to a burner and the mass of the burner plus the ethanol before
burning is determined, wog.
 The wick is lit and the flame kept steady under water.
 The water is constantly stirred until a reasonable rise in temperature is noted.
 The flame is extinguished and the highest temperature T1OC is determined.

Results

 Mass of water = mg
 Initial temperature of water = T0OC
 Final temp. of water = T1OC
 Mass of burner + ethanol before burning = wog
 Mass of burner + ethanol after burning = w1g
 SHC of water = C Jg-1C-1

Treatment of results:

Assumption:

 Neglecting heat gained by calorimeter; heat evolved by burning ethanol is equal to heat
absorbed by water.
 Temperature rise, ∆T = (T1 – T0) 0C
 Mass of ethanol burnt = (wo – w1)g
 Heat evolved = heat absorbed by water
 RMM of ethanol = 46
If (wo – w1) g of ethanol evolves mc∆T J
mc ∆T ×46
∴ 46g will evolve − (wo – w1)g
𝐦𝐜∆𝐓 ×𝟒𝟔
∴ Heat of combustion = − J
(𝐰𝐨 – 𝐰𝟏)

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 LAWS OF THERMOCHEMISTRY

There are 2 laws of thermochemistry both of which are based on the principle of conservation of
energy.

i. 1st Law:
States that, “the amount of heat energy required to decompose a compound into its
elements is equal in magnitude but opposite in sign to the amount of heat energy given
out when the compound is formed.”

e.g. NaCl (s) + (aq) ⟶ Na+ (aq) + Cl− (aq) ∆H = +776KJ

Na+ (aq) + Cl− (aq) ⟶ NaCl(s) ∆H = −776KJ

ii. 2nd Law (Hess’s law of heat summation)

States that, “enthalpy change of a chemical reaction at constant temperature and pressure is
the same irrespective of the number of stages passed but will depend on the initial and final
stages of the reaction.
Consider conversion of A to B.

a
b) A B

c) A a B
x z

C D
y
a=x+y+z

Applications of Hess’s law

 Used to determine heats of reaction which can not be determined experimentally from given
thermochemical data e.g. determining the enthalpy of formation of a compound by using
enthalpy of combustion of elements that make up a compound.
When carrying out calculations involving Hess‟s law;
 All enthalpy changes must have correct signs.
 Reversing the reaction also changes the sign of the enthalpy change
 Multiplying or dividing an equation by certain number also multiplies/ divides the
enthalpy change by the same number.
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
  States of the reactants and products must always be specified.

Examples:

3. Calculate the enthalpy change of formation of Carbon monoxide given that the enthalpy of
combustion of carbon is −393kJmol-1, and the enthalpy of combustion of carbon monoxide is
– 286kJmol-1

Solution:

1
C(s) + 2 O2 (g) ⟶ CO ∆Hθf = ?
iii. C(s) + O2 (g) ⟶ CO2 (g) ∆Hθc = −393kJmol-1
1
iv. CO(g) + 2 O2 (g) ⟶ CO2 (g) ∆Hθc = – 286kJmol-1
Reversing equation (ii) and adding equation (i)
iii. C(s) + O2(g) ⟶ CO2 (g) ∆Hθc = −393kJmol-1

+
1
iv. CO2(g) ⟶ CO2(g) + 2 O2 (g) ∆Hθc = – 286kJmol-1

1
C(s) + 2 O2 (g) ⟶ CO (g) ∆Hθf = − 107kJmol-1

4. Calculate the enthalpy change of formation of methane from the following thermochemical
data.
Enthalpy of combustion of Carbon = −393kJmol-1
Enthalpy of combustion of hydrogen = – 286kJmol-1
Enthalpy of combustion of methane = −890kJmol-1

Solution:
C(s) + 2H2 (g) ⟶ CH4 (g) ∆Hθf = ?
iv. C(s) + O2 (g) ⟶ CO2 (g) ∆Hθc = −393kJmol-1
1
v. H2(g) + 2 O2 (g) ⟶ H2O (l) ∆Hθc = −286kJmol-1
1
vi. CH4(g) + 2 O2 (g) ⟶ CO2(g) + 2H2O l ∆H = −890kJmol-1

Multiplying equation (ii) by 2 and reversing (iii) we obtain

ii. 2H2 + O2 (g) ⟶ 2H2O ∆Hθc = − 572kJmol-1

+
iii. CO2 (g) + 2H2O (l) ⟶ CH4 (g) + 2O2 (g) ∆H = +890kJmol-1
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
iv. 2H2 (g) + CO2 (g) ⟶ CH4 + O2 (g) ∆H =318kJmol-1

+
i C(s) + O2(g) ⟶ CO2 g ∆Hθc = −393kJmol-1

C(s) + 2H2 (g) ⟶ CH4 (g) ∆Hθf = −75kJmol-1

Activity:

3. Calculate the enthalpy of reaction;

2C(s) + 2H2(g) ⟶ C2H4(g)
Given that enthalpy of combustion of carbon = −393kJmol-1
Enthalpy of combustion of hydrogen = −286kJmol-1
Enthalpy of combustion of ethane = −1393kJmol-1
4. Calculate the heat of formation of ethanol given that the heat of combustion of liquid
ethanol is −649.15kJmol-1 while the enthalpy of formation of CO2 gas and water are –
186.7kJmol-1 and −135.1kJmol-1 respectively.
5. Calculate the heat change of the reaction C2H2 + H2O ⟶ CH3CHO from the following
data.
Molar heat of combustion of C2H2 = − 1260kJmol-1
Molar heat combustion of CH3CHO = − 1160kJmol-1
6. Calculate the enthalpy of combustion of Benzene given that the enthalpy of combustion
of Carbon is −393kJmol-1, enthalpy of formation of Benzene is +49kJmol-1, and enthalpy
of formation of water is −285kJmol-1.

CALCULATION OF ENTHALPY OF REACTION FROM;

c) Enthalpy of formation:
Enthalpy of a reaction is the difference between the total enthalpy of formation of
products and the total enthalpies of formation of reactants.
Consider the reaction;
∆𝐇𝐑
aA + bB Cc + Dd
∆HR= Total enthalpy of formation of products –
total enthalpy of formation of reactants

θ θ θ θ
⟹ ∆HR = c∆H C + d ∆H (D) − a∆H A + b∆H (B)
f f f f
Example:
2. The chemical equation for the combustion of methane is

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 CH4(g) + 2O2(g) CO2(g) + 2H2O(l)
Calculate the standard enthalpy change of combustion of methane using the values of
standard enthalpy change for methane, CO2 and water.
θ
∆H (CH4) = − 74.4kJmol-1
f
θ
∆H (CO2) = − 393.5 kJmol-1
f
θ
∆H (H2O) = − 285.8 kJmol-1
f

θ
∆H = Total enthalpy of formation of products – total enthalpy of formation of reactants
c
θ θ θ θ θ
∆H = ∆H CO2 + 2 ∆H H2 O − ∆H CH4 + 2∆H (O2 )
c f f f f

= − 393.5 + (2 × −285.8) − − 74.4 + 2 × 0

θ
∆H = − 890.7kJmol-1
c

3. Calculate the heat change in the reaction;

7
2NH3 (g) + 2 O2 (𝑔) 2NO2 (g) + 3H2O (l)
Given the following standard heats of formation in kJmol-1
NH3 (g) − 46.1kJmol-1
H2O (l) − 285.8kJmol-1
NO2 (g) 33.2kJmol-1

d) BOND ENTHALPY (BOND ENERGY)

 Bond enthalpy is the standard enthalpy change that occurs when one mole of a covalent
bond is formed from its constituent gaseous atoms.
 Therefore it is referred to as the bond energy of formation and it is denoted by a negative
value of enthalpy.
 It can also be defined as the heat change that occurs when one mole of a covalent bond is
broken down into its constituent gaseous atoms
 Therefore it is referred to as the bond dissociation energy and denoted by positive value of
enthalpy e.g.
H2 (g) 2H(g) ∆H = + 431 kJmol-1
2H2 (g) H2(g) ∆H = − 431kJmol-1
 The standard enthalpy of a reaction is the difference between the sum of average standard
bond enthalpies of products and sum of the average standard bond enthalpies of reactants.

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 ∆Hθ reaction = summation of bond energies – summation of bond energies of bonds
formed
θ
∆H = Bonds broken – bonds formed
R
Example:
3. Calculate the enthalpy change for the following reaction; N2(g) + 3H2(g) 2NH3(g)

Bond Mean of bond enthalpy

N≡N 945

H−H 436
Solution: N−H 391
N ≡ N + 3H –H 2H – N – H

H
Bonds broken = N ≡ N, H – H
Bonds formed = N – H
∆HR = Bonds broken – bonds formed
= 945 + (3 × 436) − 6 × 391
∆HR = − 93kJmol-1

4. The equation of formation of a nitrogenmonoxide gas.

1 1
N2(g) + 2 O2 (g) NO2(g)
2
Calculate the enthalpy change of formation of nitrogenmonoxide using the given bond
energies.

Bond Mean of bond enthalpy

N≡N 946kJmol-1

H−H 496 kJmol-1

N−H 630 kJmol-1

ENTHALPY OF ATOMISATION AND AVERAGE BOND ENTHALPY

c) Enthalpy of Atomisation
 Also called enthalpy of sublimation/ vapourisation

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
  Is the enthalpy changes that occurs when one mole of gaseous atoms is formed from
the elements in its normal physical state at standard conditions.
 Enthalpy change is always positive. E.g.
Na(s) Na(g)
1
Cl2 (g) Cl (g)
2
C(s) C(g)
 For a compound the standard enthalpy of atomization is the heat required to convert 1
mole of a compound in its natural state and under standard conditions into free
gaseous atoms.
 For any di-atomic molecule, enthalpy of atomization is half the bond energy.
d) Average bond enthalpy/bond energy term
 Is the average value of the standard enthalpy changes required to break a
particular covalent bond in a full range of molecules in which that bond may be
found.
 Calculations based on average standard bond enthalpies give approximate results
since true standard bond enthalpies vary from compound to compound.

Examples:

4. Calculate the C – C bond energy in ethane given that

C(s) C(g) + 713kJmol-1
+
H2(g) 2H 436 kJmol-1
2C(s) + 3H2 (g) C2H6 ∆H = − 84kJmol-1
f
Solution
Using the energy level diagram.

2C (g) + 6H (g)

2∆Hsub 3∆Hatm

2C (g) + 3H2 (g) ∆Htotal C − C

∆Hf = −84

C2H6

From Hess‟ law of constant heat summation

Total ∆H (C − C) = − (∆H ) + 2∆Hsub + 3∆Hatm
f
= − (− 84) + (2 × 713) + (3× 436)
= 2818kJmol-1
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 OR:
∆Hf
2C (s) + 3H2 C2H6

2C (g) 6H

∆H = 2 × ∆Ha C + 3∆Ha H − ∆H C−C

f f
∆H C −C = 2 × ∆Ha C + 3∆Ha H − ∆H
f f
= (2 × 713) + (3 × 436) – − 84
= 2818kJmol-1

Example (UNEB 2006 No 9)

5. (a) The standard enthalpy change of formation of SiCl4 is – 610kJmol-1. The standard
enthalpy change of atomization of Si and Cl are +338 and + 122kJmol-1 respectively. Use
these values to construct a Born Harber cycle for formation of SiCl4 from its elements and
indicate the energy changes involved.
(b) Calculate the average bond energy of the Si-Cl bond
Solution

θ
c) ∆H (SiCl4 = − 610kJmol−1
f
θ
∆H (Si) = + 338kJmol−1
a
θ
∆H (Cl2) = + 122 kJmol−1
a
∆ H θf
Si (s) + 2Cl2 (g) SiCl4(s)

4∆Hf Si − Cl
θ
∆H Si 4∆Ha (Cl)
a
Si (g) + 4Cl (g)

d) From Hess‟ law of heat summation;

∆Hfθ = ∆Haθ Si + 4 Ha Cl − 4∆Hf Si − Cl
∆Hfθ = +338 + (4 × 122) – 4∆Hf Si − Cl
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 − 610 = 826 – 4∆Hf Si − Cl

4∆Hf Si − Cl = − 1436

∆𝐇𝐟 Si − Cl = 359kJmol−1

6. Calculate the enthalpy of formation of chloromethane using the equation.

3 1
C (graphite) + 2H2 (g) + 2 Cl2 (g) CH3Cl (g) given the following
thermochemical data;
Bond energy of C – Cl = 336kJmol-1
Dissociation energy of H−H = 433kJmol-1
Dissociation energy of Cl – Cl = 248kJmol-1
Bond energy of C− H = 413kJmol-1
Enthalpy of vapourisation of graphite = 715kJmol-1
Solution
3 1
C(s) + 2 H2 (g) + 2 Cl2 (g) CH3Cl (g)

∆H at (CH3 − Cl) = 3∆Hf (C − H)

∆Hf C − Cl

C (g) + 3H + Cl

From Hess‟ law of heat summation

3 1
∆H = B∆E (H) + 2B∆E Cl − 3∆Hf C − H + ∆Hf C − Cl
f 2
3 1
= 715 + × 435 + (2 × 248) – (3×413 + 336)
2
= 1491.5 – 1575
= − 83.5kJmol−1

7. Calculate the average (C− H) Bond energy from the following enthalpies of reaction
Enthalpy of formation of CO2 = − 393kJmol-1
Enthalpy of formation of H2O = − 286kJmol-1
Enthalpy of formation of CH4 = − 890kJmol-1
Enthalpy of Atomisation of C2 = 714kJmol-1
Enthalpy of Atomisation of H2 = 436kJmol-1

EXERCISE
1. (a) What is meant by Bond energy?
(b) The figure below shows/ represents the energy diagram for formation of CH4
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 ∆H1
C(s) + 2H2 (g) CH4 (g)

∆H3 ∆H2 ∆H1

C (g) + 4H (g)

Identify the energy changes ∆H1, ∆H2, ∆H3 and ∆H4 given that;

(c) ∆H1 = − 75kJmol-1, ∆H2 = +218kJmol-1 of H2 atom, ∆H3 = +715kJmol-1

Calculate the value of:

iii. ∆H4
iv. Bond energy of C – H bond
2. Calculate the standard enthalpy of formation of C2H4 in kJmol-1 from the following
C = C Bond energy = 606kJmol-1
C – H bond energy = 410kJmol-1
H – H Bond energy =435kJmol-1
Heat of sublimation of Carbon = 710kJmol-1

BORN – HABER CYCLE

 Is the enthalpy cycle used to calculate the standard enthalpy changes which occur when an
ionic compound is formed from its elements.
 It is an application of Hess‟ law to ionic compounds.
Enthalpy changes involved in Born Haber cycle include
𝛉 𝛉
vi. Standard enthalpy of Sublimation/ Vaporisation (∆H / ∆H )
𝐬 𝐫𝐚𝐩
𝛉
vii. Standard enthalpy of atomization (∆H ):
𝐚𝐭
Is the enthalpy change when one mole of gaseous atoms is formed from an element in
standard state.
viii. Standard enthalpy of ionization (∆H )
𝐈𝐄
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 Is the enthalpy change accompanying the removal of one mole of electrons from an
atom in gaseous phase e.g. for Sodium;
θ -1
Na (g) Na+ (g) + e ∆H𝐈𝐄 (298K) = +498kJmol
 When an electron is removed from a singly positively charged ion in the gaseous phase,
enthalpy change is described as 2nd ionization enthalpy
 i.e. Na+ Na2+ +2e
ix. electron affinity/Electron gain enthalpy
Is the standard enthalpy change accompanying the addition of one electron to an atom in
the gas phase. i.e.
X (g) + e X − (g)

NB: The first electron affinity is negative while the 2nd electron affinity in positive
because work must be done to add the 2nd electron against repulsive forces exerted by the
first electrons.

𝛉
x. Standard lattice enthalpy (∆H )
𝐋
Is the enthalpy change when one mole of an ionic compound is formed from its gaseous
under standard conditions i.e.
θ
M+(g) + X −(g) MX (s) (∆H = negative)
L
OR: Is the enthalpy absorbed when one mole of an ionic compound is decomposed into its
gaseous ions.
θ
MX(s) M+(g) + X− (g) (∆H = positive)
L
Consider the formation of one mole of MX solid where M is a metal and X is a gas with a
diatomic molecule.
Equation of formation of MX
M(s) + ½X2 (g) MX(s)

Born Harber cycle showing energy changes involved:

M+(g) + X(g)

∆HIE E.A

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 M (g) ∆Hat M +(g) + X−(g)

∆H sub

1
M(s) + X2 (g)
2
∆HL
∆Hf

MX(s)

From Hess‟ law

∆H = ∆H + ∆H + ∆H + EA + ∆H
f sub IE at L
Example:
2. (a) Draw a Born Harber for the formation of solid Rubidium chloride from its elements
(b) calculate the electron affinity of chlorine atom. Use the following data;
Lattice energy of Rubidiun chloride = −665kJmol-1
Dissociation energy of chlorine gas molecule = 226kJmol-1
Heat of atomization of Rubidium metal = 84kJmol-1
Standard heat of formation of solid Rubidium chloride is – 439kJmol-1
I.E. of Rubidium atom = 397kJmol-1
Solution
2.
(a) Rb+(g) + Cl (g)

∆HIE 1st EA
B∆E
Rb(g) ∆Hatm = Rb+(g) + Cl −(g)
2

∆Hsub
1
Rb+(g) + 2
Cl (g) ∆HL

Rb Cl (s)

(b) From Hess‟ law;

∆H = ∆H + ∆H + ∆H + E.A + ∆H
f sub IE at L

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 EA = ∆H – (∆H + ∆H + ∆H + ∆H )
f sub IE at L
= −439 – (84 + 397 + 226
2 + −665)
= − 368kJmol-1

Activity
4. Draw a Born Haber cycle for the reaction of Lithium(Solid) and F(g) to form LiF(s) and
indicate clearly whether the change is exo/endothermic.
using the data below;
Enthalpy of atomization of Fluorine molecule = + 150kJmol-1
Enthalpy of sublimation of Lithium metal = 155kJmol-1
Ionization energy of Lithium atom = 518kJmol-1
Standard enthalpy of formation of solid LiF =?
Lattice enthalpy = − 1030 kJmol-1
Electron affinity of F = − 351 kJmol-1

5. Calculate the lattice energy of CaCl2 from the following thermochemical data;
Standard enthalpy of atomization of CaCl2 = − 795kJmol-1
Standard enthalpy of atomization of Chlorine = +717kJmol-1
First ionization energy of calcium = + 121 kJmol-1
2nd ionization enrgy of Calcium =1100 kJmol-1
First electron affinity of Cl = − 364 kJmol-1
6. Using the data below construct an energy level diagram and hence calculate the lattice energy
of CuO(s)

Enthalpye kJmol-1

Atomization of Cu +339
1st IE of Cu +745
Atomization of O2 + 248
2nd IE of Cu +1960
1st EA of O2 −141

FACTORS AFFECTING LATTICE ENERGY

These include:
i. Ionic charge
 The larger the ionic charge, the bigger the lattice energy
 This is because of the strong electrostatic forces of attraction between the
oppositely charged ions, e.g. the lattice energy of magnesium chloride is larger
than that of Sodium Chloride because the greater charge of Mg2+ strongly attracts
the chloride ions.

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 ii. Ionic size/radius:
 Lattice energy is inversely proportional to the ionic size i.e. large cations have less
attraction for anions because of the reduced effective nuclear charge. (Large
distance of approach) e.g. NaCl has a bigger lattice energy than KCl because the
K+ has a bigger radius than Na+.
Consider the halides of Na and their values of lattice energy.
NaF −795kJmol−1
NaCl −761kJmol−1
NaBr −742kJmol−1
NaI −699kJmol−1
Trend:
 Lattice energy of the halides decreases down the group
Explanation:
 Lattice energy of NaF is the greatest since there is greater attraction of the F− to the
Na+.
 Lattice energy of NaI is the smallest because I− has the biggest size and therefore is
least attracted by the Sodium Ion (Na+)

ENTHALPY OF SOLUTION
Is the Enthalpy change that occurs when one mole of crystal ionic compound is dissolved in a
specified number of moles of water at standard conditions.
θ
∆H solution
MX(s) + aq M+ (aq) + X− (aq)
The enthalpy change accompanying the dissolution of an ionic salt in water is either positive or
negative
The dissolution of an ionic compound of an ionic compound involves two energy terms;
iii. Separating the ionic lattice into oppositely charged gaseous ions ie
MX (s) M+ (g) + X− (g) ∆H = positive
L
The energy required is the lattice dissociation and is an endothermic process
iv. Hydration/ salvation of the oppositely charged gaseous ions and its an exothermic
process.ie
M+ (g) + X− (g) + (aq) M+ (aq) + X− (aq) ∆H = negative
Definition
Enthalpy of Hydration/ Solvation is the heat evolved when 1 mole of gaseous ions is
completely surrounded by water molecules i.e.
𝛉 𝛉 𝛉
∆𝐇 𝐬𝐨𝐥𝐮𝐭𝐢𝐨𝐧 = ∆𝐇 lattice dissociation + ∆𝐇 solvation (Hydration)

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
Born harber cycle showing the relationship between the enthalpy of solution, lattice
dissociation energy and hydration energy of salt MX

∆H solution
MX(s) + (aq) MX (aq)
lattice
dissociation ∆H hydration
enthalpy

M+(g) + X− + aq

OR

M+(g) + X− + aq

Lattice dissociation enthalpy

∆H hydration

MX(s)

∆H solution

M+(aq) + X –(aq)

Factors affecting enthalpy of solution

 Lattice energy
 Hydration energy

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
When the lattice dissociation is greater than the hydration, enthalpy of solution is endothermic,
whereas when the hydration energy is greater than lattice dissociation enthalpy, the enthalpy of
solution is exothermic.
For an ionic compound to dissolve in water, the lattice dissociation energy should be overcome
by the hydration enthalpy so that an overall negative enthalpy of solution is obtained i.e.
compounds that dissolved exothermically are more soluble than those which dissolve
endothermically.

Example:
The enthalpies of hydration and lattice energy of some salts are given below;

Salt Enthalpy of hydration Lattice energy (kJmol-1)

(kJmol-1)

KCl − 692 + 718

LiCl − 883 + 862

d) Calculate the heats of solution of K and Li Chloride. State whether dissolution is

endothermic or exothermic process in each case.
e) Which of the following two salts will be more soluble in water at a given temperature. Give
a reason for your answer.
f) How would you expect the solubility of these two salts to change with temperature?

Solution
d) ∆H = ∆H hydration + ∆H lattice energy
soln
⟹ ∆H soln (KCl) = − 692 + 718
= + 26kJmol-1
∆Hsoln (LiCl) = − 883 + 862
= − 21kJmol-1
KCl, dissolution is endothermic because enthalpy of solution is positive
LiCl dissolution is exothermic because enthalpy of solution is negative
e) LiCl, because enthalpy of solution is negative
f) kCl, solubility increases with increase in temperature because it requires more energy to
dissolve (enthalpy of solution is positive)
LiCl, solubility decreases with increase in temperature because enthalpy of solution is
exothermic.

UNEB 2003
2 (a) Define the term molar enthalpy of hydration
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 (b) The table below shows the enthalpies of Mg2+ and Cl−

Ions Enthalpy of hydration (kJmol−1)

Mg2+ 1891

Cl− 381

ii. State whether the values of enthalpies of hydration given in the table above is positive
or negative. Give a reason for your answer
iii. Calculate the enthalpy of hydration of MgCl2
Solution
iii. The values of both enthalpies are negative
Reason
− Hydration of both ions involves attraction of water molecules releasing a lot of heat
energy.
− ∆H hydration of MgCl2 = ∆H Hydration of Mg2+ + 2∆H hydration of Cl−
= − 1891 + 2 × − 381
= − 2663kJmol−1

Revision:
c) Explain the term molar enthalpy of solution
d) Draw a diagram to show the energy changes that takes place when a salt MX (s) is dissolved
in water.
NB
(ii) Anhydrous salts e.g. Anhydrous CuSO4 dissolve more exothermically than the
hydrated salts (with water of crystallisation) e.g. CuSO4.5H2O.
Reason: CuSO4 (hydrated) dissolves endothermically because ions are already
partially hydrated so that when it dissolves its lattice energy outweighs the enthalpy
associated with any further hydration.
− In Anhydrous CuSO4, the ions will have to attract more water molecules and become
surrounded by the water molecule. This increases its hydration energy more than the
lattice energy, the salt will dissolve with evolution of energy.
iv. Polar solvents like water dissolve in ionic substances because they have large dipoles
interacting strongly with solute ions which results in a high negative enthalpy of
salvation,
− Non polar solvents such as hydrocarbons do not dissolve ionic substance because there
is no negative enthalpy of salvation to compensate for the positive lattice dissociation
enthalpy.
Qn: a) Predict whether or not KI is likely to be soluble in (cyclohexane)
b) Explain your answer in (a) above

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
EXPT: To determine enthalpy of solution of an ionic compound:

Thermometer
Solution

Cork
----- ----
Stirrer ---- ------ calorimeter
-- - - empty beaker
------ -----
- - - water to prevent heat loss
----------------

Procedure:

− A known mass, m1g of water is placed in a calorimeter fixed with a stirrer and
thermometer and the temperature T1 is noted.
− A known mass m2g of finely powdered sample of an ionic compound is carefully added
to the water in the calorimeter.
− The solution is stirred thoroughly until the thermometer shows no more heat change.
− Determine and record the final steady temperature of the solution.

Results:
Mass of water = m1g
Mass of solute = m2g
Initial temperature of water = T1OC
Final temperature of solution = T2OC
∆Temperature = ∆T (T1 – T2) or (T2 – T1)
RFM of compound = Mr
SHC of solution = C
Mass of solution = (m1 + m2) g
Treatment of results:
Assumption:
 Calorimeter has negligible heat loss
 Density of water = 1gcm-3
Heat evolved = mass of solution × SHC × ∆T
= (m1 + m2) × C × ∆T
m2
Moles of ionic compound = moles
Mr
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 m2
∴ envolved (m1 + m2) × C × ∆T
Mr
(m1 + m2) × C × ∆T × Mr
1 mole of solution = m2

(𝐦𝟏 + 𝐦𝟐) × 𝐂 × ∆𝐓 × 𝐌𝐫
∆Hsolution = 𝐦𝟐
QN: P2 (2006(4))

STANDARD ENTHALPY OF NEUTRALISATION

Is the enthalpy change when one mole of H+ reacts completely with one mole of –OH to form
one mole of water. i.e.

H+ (aq) + –OH (aq) H2O (l)

NB: The enthalpies of neutralization of strong acids and strong bases are usually constant and
high because the strong acids and strong bases are fully ionized giving many free hydrogen ions
and hydroxyl ions which then react readily to release a lot of heat.

However, enthalpies of neutralization of weak acids and weak bases or strong base and vice
versa are usually low and inconsistent because in the neutralization of weak acids or base, some
energy is used fast in the ionization and later for neutralization.

EXPT: To determine enthalpy of neutralization (HCL and NaOH)

Procedure:

 A known volume Vcm3 of 2M HCl is measured and placed into a plastic cup, its initial
temperature T1 is noted.
 An equal volume of 2M NaOH is placed into another plastic cup and its initial temperature
T2 is noted.
 NaOH is then carefully added to the cup containing the acid with constant stirring.
 Highest temperature T3 attained is noted.

Results:

 Initial temperature of 2M HCl = T1OC SHC of solution = C

 Initial temperature of 2M NaOH = T2OC
T +T
 Mean initial temperature of mixture = 1 2 2 OC
 Final temperature of mixture = T3OC
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 Volume of solution(mixture) = 2Vcm3
 Total mass of mixture = 2Vg, assuming density of solution is 1gcm−3
Treatment of results
Heat change = mass of solution X C.∆T
Heat change = (2V × C × ∆T) J
Equation: NaOH (aq) + HCl (aq) NaCl (aq) + H2O (l)
3
1000cm of solution contain 2 moles of HCl
2V
Vcm3 of solution contains moles
1000
Mole ratio 1 HCl : 1 H2O
2V
Moles of water formed moles
1000
2V
moles of water envolved 2V.C.∆T
1000
2V .C.∆T ×1000
1 mole of water = 2V
∆𝐇 𝐧𝐞𝐮𝐭𝐫𝐚𝐥𝐢𝐬𝐚𝐭𝐢𝐨𝐧 = −(𝐂∆𝐓. 𝟏𝟎𝟎𝟎)𝐉

Example:
When 100cm3 of 2M HCl was added to 100cm3 of 2M NaOH, the temperature rose by 13OC.
Calculate the enthalpy of neutralization assuming density of Specific heat capacity of the
resultant solution are 1g/cm3 and 4.2Jg-1K-1 respectively.
Solution:
Total volume = 200cm3
Mass of solute = 200 × l
= 200g
Heat change = mass of solution × SHC × ∆T
= 200 × 4.2 × 13
= 10920J
H+ (aq) + −OH H2O (l)
1000cm3 of solution contains 2 moles of HCl
2 ×100
100cm3 of solution contains moles of HCl
1000
Mole ratio 1mole of acid: 1 mole of water
⟹ Moles of water formed = 0.2 moles
0.2 moles of water = 10920
∆ Heat of neutralization = − 54600J

Exercise

2. 50cm3 of NaOH solution of concentrated 0.4M required 20cm3 of H2SO4 of concentration.

0.5M for neutralization. A temperature rise of 3.4OC was realized. If both solutions and

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 calorimeter were at the same temperature, find the standard enthalpy of neutralization of
NaOH with H2SO4 (SHC of calorimeter = 39JK−1 and 4.2Jg−1K−1)

HEAT OF PRECIPITATION

Is the heat change when one mole of ionic compound is precipitated from the solution.

Example

3. When 50cm3 of 1M NaCl solution and 50cm3 of 1M AgNO3 SOLUTION are mixed, there is
a temperature rise of 7.5OC. Calculate the enthalpy of precipitation of AgCl assuming the
SHC and density of the resulting solution is 4.2Jg−1k−1 and 1gcm-3 respectively.

Solution

Total volume of solution = 100cm3

Mass of solution = 100g
Heat produced = mass of solution × SHC of solution × temperature rise
= 100 × 4.2 × 7.5
= 3150J
3
1000cm of NaCl solution contains 1 mole
1 ×50
50cm3 of NaCl solution contains moles
1000
Moles of NaCl = 0.05moles
1 mole of NaCl produces 1 mole of AgCL
0.05moles of NaCl will produce 0.05moles of AgCl
0.05moles of AgCl produced 3150J of heat.
3150
1 mole of AgCl produced J of heat
0.05
Enthalpy of precipitation = − 63000J
Exercise

4. a) Define the term heat of precipitation

b) 25cm3 of 0.5M AgNO3 solution was added to 25.0cm3 of 0.5M NaCl solution in
an insulated container. The temperature of the resulting mixture rose by 3OC. Assuming
the container has a negligible heat capacity and the SHC of the resulting mixture is 4.2
Jg-1OC-1. Calculate the heat of precipitation of AgCl.

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 CHEMICAL KINETICS
Chemical kinetics is the study of rates of reaction and factors affecting rates of reaction.

Rates of reaction

Is the rate of change in concentration of one of the products or reactants.

Rate of reaction decreases as the reaction produced and the reactant is gradually used up.
Consider a reaction A B; rate of decrease in concentration of A;
d(A)
Rate of decrease in concentration of A = − dt

d(B)
Rates of increase in concentration of B = − dt

Units of reaction rates is concentration per time e.g. moles per dm3 per second (moldm−3s−1)
The rate at the start of the reaction, when an infinitesimally small amount of the reactant has
been used up is called the initial rate.

Variation of concentration of reactants and products with time

Concentration
(molsdm−3)
Initial rate t = 0 product

Reactant

Time(s)
Initial rate of reaction can be obtained by finding the slope/ tangent to the curve at time, t = 0.

METHODS OF FINDING THE RATES OF CHEMICAL REACTIONS

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 d)
Chemical analysis
Here, the reaction is carried out in a thermostatically controlled water bath.
 Solutions of the reactants of known concentration are mixed and a stop clock started.
A sample of a reaction mixture is withdrawn with a pipette and the reaction is stopped/
quenched by either cooling or dilution into a freezing mixture or into an excess of
solvent.
 Titration is performed to find the concentration of one of the reactants or products. E.g.
oxidation of Iodide to Iodine by hydrogen peroxide.
− +
H2O2 (aq) + I(aq ) + 2H(aq ) I2 (aq) + 2H2O (l)
 Solutions of hydrogen peroxide, acid and Iodine to known concentrations are allowed to
reach the temperature of the thermostat bath.
 Solutions are mixed and the time of mixing noted.
 At measured time intervals, sample of reaction mixtures are extracted by pipette.
 Reaction in each sample is quenched by diluting in ice cold water.
 Each sample is titrated against standard aqueous sodiumthiosulphate and the
concentration of Iodine is calculated.
e) Electrical conductivity:
 Conductivity of a reaction mixture may be monitored overtime by carrying out the
reaction in a conductivity cell.
 Conductivity apparatus is calibrated with solutions of known concentration
 Conductivity of a solution is proportional to the concentration of its ions and the charges
the bear.
f) Colorimetry
 Applicable to reaction mixtures that show a steady colour as the reaction as the reaction
proceeds.
 Colorimeter indicates concentration by measuring the intensity of light shining through a
coloured reaction mixture.
 Photocell is calibrated with solutions of known concentrations
 Light of fixed wavelength is directed through the reaction mixture and into the photocell.
 Photocell develops an emf proportional to the intensity of the light.
 Emf can then be converted to concentration values.
d) Change in gas volume:

 For reactions involving gases, the rate of reaction may be monitored by measuring the
volume of gas evolved after various time intervals.
 The measured volume of gas may then be used to calculate the corresponding
concentration of the reactant. e.g. reaction of a metal with acid and the decomposition of
hydrogen peroxide.
Mg (s) + 2HCl (aq) MgCl2 (aq) + H2 (g)
2H2O2 (aq) 2H2O (l) + O2 (g)
c) Change in pressure
 An increase or decrease in gaseous pressure can be used to follow many gaseous
reactions e.g.
1
iii. The reaction: N2O5 (g) N2O4 (g) + 2 O2(g)
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
  It involves an increase in the number of moles of gas and an increase in pressure can
be followed.
iv. The reaction: H2 (g) + O2 (g) H2O (l) is accompanied by a decrease in the
number of moles, and decrease in pressure at constant volume.
d) Spectrophotometry
 Applicable for the reactions which are extremely rapid.
 Uses a very short burst of light from a laser to start reaction that is sensitive to light.
 Spectroscopic techniques then monitor the concentration of the reactive intermediate
formed.

SOME COMMON TERMS

ix. Rate law:

 States that, “the rate of any chemical reaction at a constant temperature is directly
proportional to the molar concentration of the reactants raised to appropriate power
whose value is experimentally determined.”
 It summarises the relationship the rate of a chemical reaction and the concentration of
the reactants.
x. Rate equation:
 Expresses the rate of reaction in terms of the concentration of each reactant raised to a
specific power. Consider a reaction A + B Products
x Y
From Rate law; Rate ∝ A B
Where k = rate constant/ coefficient

X = order of reaction with respect to A

Y = Order of reaction with respect to B

xi. Rate constant / Rate coefficient:

Is the ratio of the rate of a chemical reaction to the products of the concentration of the
reactants raised to appropriate powers as in the rate equation.
Units vary according to the overall aorder i.e.
From Rate = k A x B Y
Rate
K= A x B Y
xii. Order of reaction
 Is the power to which the concentration term of a single reactant is raised in the
experimental rate equation.
OR
 Is the sum of the powers to which the concentration terms of reactents are raised in
the experimental rate equation .
xiii. Overall order equation\
Is the sum of the powers to which the concentration terms are raised in the experimental
rate equation.
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 From Rate = k A x B Y
Overall order = x + y
xiv. Molecularity of a reaction:
Is the number of species (atoms/ molecules) which participate in a reaction as given by
the stoichiometric equation

Difference between molecularity and order of a reaction

Molecularity Order of equation

 Only whole numbers and is never zero Can be a fraction, zero or a whole number

 Determined from a Stoichiometric equation Experimentally determined

 Number of species that take part in the rate Power to which the concentration of the
determining state reactant is raised in the experimental rate
equation

xv. Rate determining step/Rate limiting step:

Is the slowest step in a multi step chemical reaction through which the reactants are
converted to the products.
xvi. Elementary reactions:
These are reactions that involve one step path or route from reactants to products.
For elementary reactions, molecularity is equal to the order of reaction.
However, the reactions which are not elementary, molecularity may not be equal to order of
reaction. E.g. in hydrolysis of a reactant such as ester/ sucrose in presence of a large excess
of water.
Consider hydrolysis of sucrose;
Sucrose + water Glucose + Fructose
C12H22O11 + H2O C6H12O6 + C6H12O6
Molecularity of above reaction is true because both sucrose and water are involved in the rate
determining step.
However, the overall order of this reaction is first order when experimentally determined.
Reason
 Water is present in large excess, its concentration remains unaffected and hence doesn‟t
contribute to the order of the reaction.
 Only sucrose concentration changes during the course of a reaction, affecting the rate of
reaction with an order one.

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 NB: Such reactions where water is in excess making its concentration zero is referred to as
pseudo – first order reaction.

DETERMINATION OF ORDER OF REACTION FROM INITIAL RATE METHOD

In this method, the order of reaction in respect to a given reactant is determined by comparing
the initial rate for the experiments in which the concentration of only the reactant whose order of
reaction is to be determined is changing while the other reactant concentration are kept constant.
It therefore requires more than one reactant.
For zero order reaction, the rate of reaction is not affected by change in initial concentration of
the reactant e.g. doubling the concentration of the reactant has no effect on the rate.
For all 1st order reactions, doubling the initial concentration of the reactant also doubles the rate,
Trebling it also trebles the rate i.e. increasing the concentration of reactant of factor y also
increases the rate by some factor y.
For second order reactions, doubling or trebling initial concentration of the reactant increases the
rate by 4 or 9 times respectively.

Example:
The result shown refers to oxidation of Bromine ion by Bromate ion in acidic solution.
5Br – (aq) + BrO−3 (aq) + 6H (aq)
+ 3Br2 (aq) + 3H2O (l)

[5Br –](mol dm−3) Br𝐎−

𝟑 (mol dm )
−3 H+(mol dm−3) Initial rate (mol dm−3)

v. 0.10 0.10 0.10 8 × 10 − 4

vi. 0.10 0.20 0.10 1.6 × 10−3

vii. 0.20 0.20 0.10 3.2 × 10−3

viii. 0.10 0.10 0.20 3.2 × 10−3

f) Find the order of the reaction with respect to;

i. Br –
ii. Br O−3
iii. H+
g) State the overall order of reaction
h) Write the rate equation
i) Calculate the value of rate constant and state its units.
j) Calculate the rate reaction when concentration of all three reactants is 0.2mol dm−3
Solution
f) (i) Br −
Let the order of the reaction with respect to Br − be x
Let the order of reaction with respect to Br O3− be y
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 Let the order of reaction with respect to H+ be z
Taking experiments (ii) and (iii)
Rate = K[Br−]X [Br3− ]y [H+]z
1.6 × 10−3 = K [0.10]x [0.2]y [0.10]z ------------------------- (i)
3.2 × 10−3 = K [0.2]x [0.2]y [0.1]z ________________________ (ii)
Dividing equation (ii) by (i)
3.2 × 10−3 K[0.2]x [0.2]y [0.1]z
= K [0.10]x [0.2]y [0.10]z
1.6 × 10−3

3.2 × 10−3 0.2 X

=
1.6 × 10−3 0.1
1 x
2 =2
X=1
Order of reaction with Br− is 1
Reason:
Doubling the concentration of Br − doubles the initial rate
(ii) BrO −
3
Taking experiments (i) and (ii)
Rate = K[Br−]X [Br3− ]y [H+]z
For (i); 8 × 10 – 4 = K [0.1]X [0.1 ]y [0.1]z ______________________ (i)
For (ii); 1.6 × 10−3 = K[0.1]X [0.2 ]y [0.1]z ___________________ (ii)
Dividing equation (ii) by (i)
1.6 × 10−3 K[0.1]X [0.2 ]y [0.1]z
= K [0.1]X [0.1 ]y [0.1]z
8 × 10 – 4
1.6 × 10−3 0.2 y
=
8 × 10 – 4 0.1
1 y
2 =2
Y=1
The order of reaction with respect to Br𝐎−
𝟑 is 1
Reason:
Doubling the concentration of BrO−
3 doubles the rate.

(iii) H+
Taking experiment (i) and (iv)
Rate = K[Br−]X [Br3− ]y [H+]z
For (i); 8 × 10 – 4 = K [0.1]X [0.1 ]y [0.1]z ______________________ (i)
For (iv): 3.2 × 10−3 = K [0.1]x [0.1]y [0.2]z ________________________ (ii)
Dividing (ii) by (i)

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
3.2 × 10−3 K [0.1]x [0.1]y [0.2]z
= K [0.1]X [0.1 ]y [0.1]z
8 × 10 – 4
z
4=2
22 = 2z
Z=2

Order of reaction with respect to H+ is 2

Reason;
Doubling the reaction with respect to H+ rate increases by factor four (4) (rate quadruples)
g) Rate = K[Br−]1 [Br3− ]1 [H+]2
Overall order = 2 + 1 + 1 = 4
h) Rate = K[Br−]1 [Br3− ]1 [H+]2
i) From rate = K[Br−]1 [Br3− ]1 [H+]2
Rate 3.2 × 10−3 (𝐦𝐨𝐥 𝐝𝐦−𝟑)
K = [Br −]1 [Br − ]1 [H+]2 = 0.2 0.2 (0.1)2 (𝐦𝐨𝐥 𝐝𝐦−𝟑)(𝐦𝐨𝐥 𝐝𝐦−𝟑)(𝐦𝐨𝐥 𝐝𝐦−𝟑)
3
= 8𝐦𝐨𝐥 − 𝟑 𝐝𝐦4 s-1
j) Rate = 8 (0.2)(0.2) (0.2)2
= 0.0128mol dm-3s-1
Example

2. For the reaction A + B C, the following results were obtained for kinetic run at
the same temperature.

[A](mol dm−3) [B] (mol dm−3) Initial rate (mol dm−3s−1)

0.20 0.10 0.2

0.40 0.20 0.8

0.40 0.20 0.8

Find:

d) Rate equation of reaction

e) Rate constant
f) Initial rate of reaction when [A] = 0.6moldm-3 and [B] = 0.3 moldm-3

Solution:

b) Doubling the concentration of A quadruples the rate giving order 2.

For B, doubling the concentration has no effect on rate hence zero order.
c) Rate = k[A]2
rate 0.20
K = [A]2 = (0.20)2 = 5 mol-1dm3s-1
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 Rate = k [A]2[B]0
= 5[0.6]2
= 1.8 mol dm-3s-1
Exercise
3. The table below shows some data for the reactions;

[A](mol dm−3) [B] (mol dm−3) Initial rate (mol dm−3s−1)

1.00 × 10-2 2.8 × 10 -3 2.2

5.00 × 10-3 2.8 × 10-3 1.1

1.00 × 10-2 5.6 × 10-3 4.4

e)
Determine the order of reaction with respect A and B
f)
Write the rate equation of reaction
g)
Calculate the rate constant and find its unit
Calculate the rate reaction when concentration of A and B is A = 8.5 × 10-3moldm-3,
h)
B = 3.83 × 10-3moldm-3
4. 2 – Bromo – 2 – methylpropane, (CH3)3CBr and NaOH react together according to the
following equation
(CH3)3CBr + O H (CH3)3COH + Br –
The following data gives the results of three experiments used to determine the rate
equation from the reaction at 25OC.

Experiment Initial (CH3)3CBr Initial [𝐎H] (moldm-3) Initial rate of

(moldm-3) reaction (moldm-3)

1 6.0 × 10-3 7.0 × 10-1 8.0 × 10−3

2 9.0 10-3 2.0 × 10-1 6.0 × 10−3

3 10.0 10 -3 4.0 × 10−1 6.0 × 10 −3

From these results, it can be deduced that the rate equation is;
Rate = K [(CH3)3CBr]
iv. Show how the data can be used to determine/ deduce that the reaction is 1st order with respect
to (CH3)3CBr and zero order with respect to OH.
v. Calculate the value of the rate constant at this temperature and state its units.
vi. Calculate the initial rate of reaction when the initial concentration of (CH3)3CBr is 4.0 × 10-3
moldm-3 and the initial concentration of OH is 1.0 × 10-1 moldm-3
b) Name and outline a mechanism for the reaction at primary haloalkane (CH3)3CBr with
.aqueous NaOH.

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
CLASSIFICATION OF CHEMICAL REACTIONS ACCORDING TO OVERALL
ORDER

1. Zero Order Reactions

 Rate of reaction is independent of the concentration of the reactant
 The rate equation for the zero order reaction is given by;
Rate = K A 0 ⟹ Rate = K (constant)
Where A is a constant in the determining step.
A plot of rate of reaction against concentration of concentration of reactant

Rate

Concentration of reaction
d [A]
From Rate = − = K[A]O
dt

d [A]
=− =K
dt

− d [A] =Kdt

Integrate from A0 at t = 0 to At at time t = t

At t=t
−∫A0 d[A] = K∫t=0 dt

At t=t
− [A] A0 = Kt t=0
− At – −A0) = Kt
− At + Ao = Kt
At = − Kt + A0 (y = mx + c)
A plot of concentration against time

Ao

Concentration

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 Slope = − K

Time (s)

Examples of zero order reactions

− Iodination of Propanone in which the reaction is zero order with respect to Iodine.
− Reactions between gases, where rate of reaction with respect to one of the reactants is zero
order. This indicates that this reactant has been absorbed on the surface of the vessel and the
rate only depends on the frequency of collision between the non absorbed gas with the inside
of the vessel e.g. decomposition of NH3 (g) to Nitrogen to Hydrogen in the presence of a hot
tungsten wire.

Experiment: To determine order of reactions with respect to Iodine in the Iodination of

propanone catalysed by H2SO4

Procedure:

− Solutions of known concentration of Propanone, Iodine in KI and H2SO4 of known pH are

prepared and brought to a required temperature in a thermostat bath.
− A fixed volume of this mixture is pipetted into a flask and a stop watch is started.
− After a few minutes, a sample of the reacting mixture is pipetted from the solution into
Sodium hydrogen Carbonate solution. This stops the reaction instantly by neutralizing the
acid.
− The time at which the reaction stops is noted.
− The resultant mixture is then titrated with a standard solution of Sodium thiosulphate (S2O3)
to determine the amount of Iodine that remains.
− The procedure is repeated at intervals of 5 minutes to determine the amount of Iodine that has
remained.
− The volume of thiosulphate (S2O3) required is plotted against the time elapsed since the start
of reaction.

A plot of volume of Sodium thiosulphate against time

Volume of
Sodium
thiosulphate

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 Time(s)

Rate of the reaction remains constant as the iodine concentration decreases.

Example (QUIZ)

c) Describe an experiment to show Iodination of Propanone follows a zero order reaction with
respect to Iodine. (7mks)
d) Propanone reacts with Iodine in the presence of an acid catalyst according to the equation
O
∥
H+
CH3COCH3 (aq) + I2 (aq) CH3CCH2I + HI (aq)
The reaction is first order with respect to Propanone and independent of the concentration of
Iodine. Briefly describe how the order of reaction with respect to Iodine can be determined.

2. First Order Reactions

 Rate of reaction is proportional to the first power of concentration of single reactants.

 Consider a reaction A going to products; A products
d[A] 1
Rate = − dt = K [A]
Rate = k [A], from y = mx + c, c = 0
A graph of rate against concentration of reactants

Rate

Slope = K

Concentration of reactant

Examples of first order reactions

 Hydrolysis of sucrose in presence of acid.

 Acid catalysed hydrolysis of an ester.
 Radioactive decay
 Decomposition of nitrogen pentaoxide N2O5
 Decomposition of Benzene diazonium chloride.
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
Radioactive decay and half life

Half life:

Is the time taken from the concentration to fall to half its original value.
d[A]
Rate of reaction = − = K [A]
dt

Separating variables;
d[A]
− = 𝐾 dt
[A]

Integrating between the limits Ao at times t = 0 to t = t

At d[A] t=t
− ∫Ao = k ∫t=0 dt
[A]

At t=t
− In[A] Ao
= kt t=0

− In At – (− InA0) = kt

Ao
In = kt
At

Ao
But In = 2.303log10 ⟹ 2.303 log = kt --------- (i)
At
Ao
At t = A½ ; At = 2
Ao
2.303log A = kt ½
½
0.693
t ½ = 2.303log 2 = K
0.693
∴ t½ = --------------------------- (ii)
K
For 1st order reactions, half life is constant and independent of the initial concentration of
the reactant.
A graph of concentration of A against time

Ao
Conc. of A
Ao
2

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 Ao
4

0 t½ 2t ½ Time (s)
First order reaction (t ½ − 0) = (2t ½ − t ½ )
Ao
Also from 2.303log At = kt

Ao kt
⟹ Log = 2.303 (y = mx + c)
At

𝐀𝐨
A plot of against time
𝐀𝐭

Ao
Log At

K
Slope = 2.303

Time (s)
Ao K
Also from log = 2.303
At

K
log Ao – log At = 2.303

K
log At = log Ao − 2.303

log At Ao
K
Slope = − 2.303

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 Time

UNEB 2011

3. The table below shows the kinetic data that was obtained for the conversion of sucrose to
glucose in acid solution.

Time (s) 0 20 40 60 ∞

Conc. of sucrose (mol dm−3) 0.08 0.06 0.04 0.02 0.01

Rate of reaction (moldm−3) 0.004 0.003 0.002 0.001 0.0005

v. Plot a graph of rate of reaction against the concentration of sucrose.

vi. State the order of the reaction. Give a reason for your answer.
vii. Determine the rate constant for the reaction and indicate its units.
viii. Calculate the rate of the reaction when the concentration of sucrose was 0.12moldm−3.
4. Compound B undergoes a reaction to form compound W. the course of the reaction Can be
followed by adding excess KI solution to a fixed volume of the reactant. B reacts with a
standard solution of Sodium thiosulphate. The volume of the Sodium thiosulphate solution is
a measure of the concentration of B remaining at time T. THE TABLE BELOW shows the
volume of Sodium thiosulphate, V required at various times.

V(cm3) 24.70 17.80 12.90 9.25 5.50 3.60

t (mins) 0 60 120 180 240 300

f) Plot a graph of V against time

g) From the graph in (a), deduce the time for B; to
iii. be reduced to half the original value
1
iv. be reduced to 4 the original value
h) What is the order of the reaction with respect to B?
i) Write the rate equation for the reaction in which B is converted to W.
j) Determine the rate constant for the reaction.
NB: When only time and the concentration of the product is given, the concentration of the
reactant at each time is got by subtracting the concentration of the product at that time from the
concentration of the product at the end of the reaction. i.e.

[Reactants]t = [product]end – [product]t

A plot of the concentration of reactant and time is then made e.g. given;

W + H2O products
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 Product (moldm-3) 30 90 120 135 150

Time (s) 0 20 40 60 ∞

[Product] (moldm-3) 30 90 120 135 150

[reactant] (moldm-3) (150 − 30) (150− 90) (150− 120) (150− 135) (150− 150)

= 120 = 60 = 30 = 15 =0

Experimental determination of order of catalyzed decomposition of H2O2

Procedure:

 A fixed volume of H2O2 solution is pipette

 About 1cm3 of NaOH solution followed by 1cm3 of FeCl3 solution is added. The time for
which the FeCl3 is added is noted.
 Mixture is shaken and allowed to stand for 3 minutes.
 20cm3 of 1M H2SO4 is added to stop the decomposition.
 The resultant mixture is then titrated with a standard solution of KMnO4 to determine the
amount of H2O2 undecomposed.
 The procedure is repeated at intervals of 3 minutes before adding H2SO4 and the titre values
Vt noted.
 The initial concentration of H2O2 before decomposition is obtained by titrating the original
H2O2 with KMnO4 and titre value V0 is noted.
 Volumes of KMnO4 required is plotted against time elapsed since the start of the reaction.

Treatment of results:

Volume of Vo
3
KMnO4 (cm ) OR log Vt

Time (s) Time (s)

𝐕𝐨
log 𝐕𝐭

k
Slope = 2.303

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 Time (s)

UNEB 2011

4. Describe an experiment to show that catalytic decomposition of H2O2 is a first order reaction.
5. A certain volume of H2O2 solution was decomposed in the presence of platinum. The amount
of H2O2 after time t was found by withdrawing a liquid of small portions of solution, adding
dilute H2SO4 and titrating with Potassium manganate (VII) solution. The volume Vt of
Potassium manganate (VII) solution were as follows;

t (min) 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45

Vt (cm3) 12.30 9.20 6.90 5.20 3.90 2.90 2.20 1.60 1.20 1.15

vi. Tabulate values of log Vt

vii. Plot a graph of log Vt against time
viii. State order of reaction with respect H2O2. Give reason for your answer.
ix. Determine the rate constant for the reaction
x. Calculate the half life for the reaction

NB: Conditions for first order reaction

 If one of the reactants is in large excess that only a small fraction of it will be used up in the
reaction.
 Use of acid catalyst; where its concentration doesn‟t change during the course of the reaction
e.g acid catalysed hydrolysis of esters and glucose.

6. SECOND ORDER REACTION

Rate of reaction is proportional to the products of the concentration of reactants each raised
to power 1 or to the square of the concentration of a single reactant.
For A Products , rate = k[A]2
For A + B Products, Rate = k[A]1 [B]1
Graphs of second order reactions

Rate of Rate of
Rxn rxn

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 Concentration of reactant concentration2

Half life:

For second order reactions, half life is inversely proportional to the concentration. Ie. It almost
doubles for every successive decrease in concentration of the reactant by ½

Concn Ao b>a

A½

A¼

a b Time

−d[A]
From Rate = − = k[A]2
dt

−d[A]
2 = Kdt
[A]

At d[A] t=t
− ∫A0 2 = ∫t=0 kdt
[A]
−1 At t=t
−[ ] A0 = kt t=0
[A]
1 At
] A0 = kt
A

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
1 1
− = kt
At A0
1 1
= kt +
At A0
𝐀𝐨
At 𝐭 ½ ; At = 𝟐

1 1
Ao = kt +
A0
2

2 1
− =k𝐭 ½
Ao A0
𝟏
⟹ 𝐭½ =
𝐀𝐨𝐤
Examples of 2nd order reactions

− Hydrolysis of ethyl ethanoate by aqueous NaOH

− Oxidation of I− to I2 by H2O2

FACTORS AFFECTING RATES OF REACTION

These include

vii. Concentration of reactants in solution

viii. Temperature
ix. Pressure of gaseous reactants
x. Light
xi. Catalyst
xii. Surface area/size of particle of a solid reactant.

Surface area:

− For reactions involving solids, breaking the solid into smaller pieces increases its total
surface area.
− Increase in SA of the reactants increases the rate of reaction by exposing more
reactant molecules to react with another.
Light;

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 − Photosensitive reactions e.g. photosynthesis and formation of Ag and Ag salts which
take place when a photographic film is exposed to light, their rates increase with
exposure to light.
− Light of sufficient energy breaks the bonds in one of the reactants creating a reactive
intermediate from which the products are formed.

Pressure of gaseous reactants:

Increase in pressure of gases pushes the gaseous molecules close together; increasing on their
frequency of collision and thus reacting more rapidly.

Concentration;

− Increasing the concentration of the reactants increases the rate of reaction and vice
versa
− This is because at greater concentration, there are more molecules in a given volume,
close distance between these molecules are reduced and there is an increased number
of collisions per unit volume.

Example:

2. The rate equation for 2A + B C is given by Rate = k[A] [B]2 . How will the rate of
reaction alter if concentration of
iv. A is doubled but concentration of B is kept constant
v. Concentration of B is halved but concentration of A is kept constant
vi. Both Concentration of A and concentration of B are doubled

Solution:

iv. Rate = k[A] [B]2

= k[2A] [B]2
= 2k [A] [B]2
New rate is twice the initial rate
v. Rate = k[A] [½B]2
= ½ 2 k [A] B 2
= ¼ k [A] [B]2
New rate is ¼ times the initial rate
vi. From Rate = k[A] [B]2
Rate = k [2A] [2B]2
= (2)(4) k[A] [B]2
= 8 k[A] [B]2
NEW rate is 8 times the initial rate

Exercise

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 The rate of a certain reaction is Rate = k[A] [B]2 [C] where [C] is the concentration moles per
litre and k is the rate constant. State how the rate of the reaction will change if;

v. Concentration of B and C is doubled and A is kept constant

vi. Concentration of A and C were kept constant and concentration of B is halved
vii. [A] and [C] were kept constant and [B] was doubled.
viii. Concentration of A, B and C were doubled.

Temperature:

− Increasing the temperature of the reactants increases the rate of a reaction.

− At higher temperatures, the ions/ molecules of the reactants have more energy moving
with greater average velocity and collide more frequently and with more force.
− Increased collision frequency results in a higher rate of reaction.

MAXWELL – BOLTZMANN DISTRIBUTION OF MOLECULAR ENERGY, E

 It shows activation energy the key to the dependence of the rate reaction on temperature.
 Activation energy: is the minimum energy with colliding molecules need in order to react to
form products.
 Maxwell – Boltzman started that; Rate of reaction doubles for every 100C rise in temperature
as shown below.

A Plot of fraction of number of molecules with energy E against energy E

T1 T2 > T1 no of molecules with Energy ≥ Ea

No. of
Molecules with Ea No of molecules with energy ≤ Ea
Energy, E T2

Energy, E

Interpretation

 At lower temperature (T1), a very large fraction of the molecules have energy close to the
average energy, only a small fraction of the molecules having very high energies.
 At higher temperature (T2), there is a wide range of molecular energies.
 At higher temperatures therefore, the many more – energetic molecules increase the
likelihood of successive collision increasing the rate of reaction.

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
Qn: Explain with the help of Maxwell - distribution diagram why the rate of some reactions
approximately doubles when the temperature is increased by 100C around room temperature.

Relationship between the rate constant, K and temperature

 Arrhenius equation relates the magnitude of the rate constant and the temperature
 The equation can be used to calculate the activation energy from the rates of reactions at
different temperatures.
−Ea
K = Ae RT

Ea
InK = InA − RT

Where A = Arrhenius factor (pre exponential factor)

K = Rate constant
Ea = Activation energy
T = absolute temperature
R = Gas constant

A plot of 𝐥𝐧 𝐊 against temperature

ln A
−Ea
ln K Slope = R

1
(K −1 )
Temp

𝐄𝐚
A Plot of log K against 𝟏 𝐓 (log K = log A − )
𝟐.𝟑𝟎𝟑 𝐑𝐓

log A

log K

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 𝐄𝐚
Slope = −
𝟐.𝟑𝟎𝟑 𝐑

1
(K −1 )
T

 If K1 is the rate constant at temperature T1 and K2 is the rate constant at temperature T2

Ea
From ln K = ln A − RT

K1 → T1, K2 → T2
Ea
ln K1 = ln A − RT 1 ------------------------ (i)

Ea
ln K2 = ln A − RT 2 ------------------------ (ii)

(ii) – (ii)
Ea Ea
ln K1 − ln K2 = − RT 1 − − RT 2

K1 Ea Ea
ln K2 = −
RT 2 RT 1

𝐊𝟏 𝐄𝐚 𝐓𝟏−𝐓𝟐
⟹ 𝐥𝐧 = ___________________ (i)
𝐊𝟐 𝐑 𝐓𝟐𝐓𝟏

OR
𝐊𝟐 𝐄𝐚 𝐓𝟐−𝐓𝟏
𝐥𝐧 = ___________________ (ii)
𝐊𝟏 𝐑 𝐓𝟐𝐓𝟏

But ln = 2.303 log 10

𝐊𝟏 𝐄𝐚 𝐓𝟏 −𝐓𝟐
𝐥𝐨𝐠 =
𝐊𝟐 𝟐.𝟑𝟎𝟑𝐑 𝐓𝟐 𝐓𝟏

𝐄𝐱𝐚𝐦𝐩𝐥𝐞

2. The activation energy for a certain reaction is 50kJmol-1. What is the effect on the rate
constant of increasing the temperature by 10K around room temperature (assumed to be 150C
which is 288K)
Solution:

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
T1 = (15 + 273) = 288K

T2 = 288 + 10 = 298K
𝐊 𝐄𝐚 𝐓𝟐 −𝐓𝟏
From log 𝐊𝟐 = 𝟐.𝟑𝟎𝟑𝐑
𝟏 𝐓𝟐 𝐓𝟏

K 5000 298 −288

log K 2 = 2.303 ×8.314
1 298∙288

K
log K 2 = 0.30426871
1

K2
= log −1 (0.30426871) = 2.0149
K1

𝐊𝟐
≈2
𝐊𝟏

The final rate is twice the initial rate

3. The rate 2N2O5 2N2O4 (g) + O2 (g) was studied at various temperatures and the rate
constants were determined at those temperatures as shown in the table below.

Temp o C 20 35 45 65

Rate constant 2.76 × 10−4 1.35 × 10−4 4.94 × 10−4 4.87 × 10−3

Calculate the activation energy Ea for the reaction.

Vi) Catalyst:

 Is a substance that alters the rate of chemical reaction but remains chemically at the end
of the reaction.
 They speed up the rate of chemical reaction by providing an alternative root of lower
activation energy from reactants to products.

Reaction profile and uncatalysed reactions

Potential Path of uncatalysed reaction

Energy Activation energy of uncatalysed reaction

Reactant Path of catalysed reaction

Ea of catalysed reaction
Products

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 Reaction coordinate

UNEB 2012 (5) d

iv. Using the same axis, draw a labeled diagram for energy – reaction coordinate for a catalysed
and uncatalysed.
v. State the difference in your diagrams
vi. State how a catalyst increases the rate of a reaction.

Classification of catalyst

 A catalyst is classified according to the physical state it is in compared to the reactant

namely.
c) Heterogeneous catalyst
d) Homogenous catalyst.
c) Heterogeneous catalyst
 Catalysts and reacting substances are in different states
 Examples include
iv. Combination of hydrogen and Oxygen under the influence of platinum
v. Using of Fe in the Haber Process
vi. Nickel catalyst in the in the hardening of vegetable oils in the production of
Margarine.
vii. Vanadium (v) oxide in the contact process
𝐕𝟐 𝐎𝟓 (𝐬)
2SO2 (g) + O2(g) SO3(g)

Heterogeneous catalyst takes place at the surface of the Catalyst.

Reactants are absorbed onto the surface of the catalyst, bonds are broken and new bonds formed.
The products are absorbed from the surface

d) Homogenous catalyst
 Catalyst and reacting substances are in the same physical states. E.g.s include
iv. Acid catalysed hydrolysis
v. Peroxidase enzyme in the mammalian liver.
vi. Use of Aq. CoCl2 in the reaction between H2O2 and aqueous solution of Sodium –
Potassium 2, 3 – dihydroxybutandioate.

Features of Catalysts

v. Very specific to a single reaction or to class of very similar reactions.

vi. Catalyst both forward and backward reaction at the same extent and therefore have no effect
on equilibrium constant or equilibrium position.
vii. Small quantities can usually achieve a huge increase in rate of reaction.
viii. Catalyst maybe poisoned by some other substances e.g. lead, Arsenic and cyanide.

Experiment Determination of a mechanism of a reaction

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 Reaction mechanism is a detailed step by step description of the pathways followed by
reactants in forming products.
 It specifies all intermediate stages and all intermediate species formed.

Examples;

iv. Hydrolysis of primary alkyl halide.

 The reaction is first order with respect to Hydroxyl ion and also first order with
respect Bromoethane giving an overall order of 2.

Equation:

CH3CH2Br + NaOH CH3CH2OH + NaBr

Mechanism:

NaOH (aq) Na+ (aq) + OH (aq)

HO
fast
CH2 Br ⇄ HO − −CH2 − −Br +
HOCH2CH3

CH3

Reactants Activated complex

Rate = K [OH] [CH3 CH2Br]

Reaction profile for substitution Nucleophilic (SN2)

Potential
+
Energy Activated complex 𝐇𝐎 − −𝐂𝐇𝟐 − −𝐁𝐫 −
CH3

CH3CH2OH + 𝐎 𝐇

∆H
CH3CH2OH + Br −

Reaction coordinate

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 NB:

Activated complex is an unstable intermediate in which bonds of the reactant molecules are
partially breaking while the new bonds of the product molecules are partially being formed.

v. Hydrolysis of tertially alkyl halides (2 – Bromo – 2 – methyl propane)

Equation:

(CH3)3C – Br (CH3)3 C+ + Br−

Fast
(CH3)3C+ (CH3)3C – OH

OH Product

𝐑𝐞𝐚𝐜𝐭𝐢𝐨𝐧 𝐩𝐫𝐨𝐟𝐢𝐥𝐞 of substitution Nucleophilic Unimolecular (SN)

vi. Oxidation of Iodine to Iodide by H2O2

H2O2 (aq) + 2I−(aq) + 2H3O+ (aq) I2(aq) + 4H2O(l)

Mechanism

slow
iv. H2O2 (aq) + I−(aq) ⇄ IO−(aq) + H2O(l)

Fast
v. IO− (aq) + H3O+(aq) ⇄ HIO (aq) + H2O (l)
Fast
vi. HIO (aq) + I−(aq) H3O+ I2(aq) + 2H2O(l)
Rate = K [H2O2] I
Overall order = 2
Questions (UNEB 1999 QN 14)
3. 2 – Bromo – 2- methyl propane reacts with aqueous NaOH to form 2 – methyl – propan
– 2 – ol
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 d) Write the rate equation for the reaction.
e) Draw an energy diagram for the reaction
f) Write the mechanism for the reaction
g) State the;
iii. Rate determining step of the reaction
iv. Technique which was used to study the reaction
4. Bromo – methane reacts with aqueous NaOH according to the following equations
CH3Br + oH (aq) CH3OH (aq) + Br – aq ∆H = −VE.
The overall order is 2
c) Draw a fully labeled diagram of energy versus reaction pathway for the reaction.
d) Explain what is meant by the term activated complex.
iii. Write the rate equation for the reaction
iv. Outline a mechanism for the reaction.

NOTE:
 Transition state is a state of maximum potential energy during a chemical
reaction in which the substance present at that state can now form the products
of the reaction or can give back the reactants.
 Activation energy is an energy barrier that must first be overcome for any
chemical reaction to occur.

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 PHYSICAL EQUILIBRIA
Some common terms;
Solution
 Is the mixture of two or more non chemically reactive substance whose composition/ relative amounts vary
within a certain limits
 can be gaseous, liquid or solid of variable composition
Binary solution
 is a solution which consists of only two components e.g.
(i) Solution of volatile component such as carbon dioxide in water
(ii) Solution of non volatile component such as bromine in water
For each of the above cases, the major component is the solvent and the minor is the solute
SOLUTION OF A VOLATILE COMPONENT
 when a binary solution contains a volatile solute, the vapour from the solution would contain both molecules of
the solution and the solvent
 Vapour pressure of each component above the liquid mixture will be lowered at particular temperature
NB. Presence of non-volatile solute at the surface of the solution; reduces the escaping tendencies of the solvent
molecules ; lowering its vapour pressure resulting in the boiling point of the solution to be raised.
THE IDEAL SOLUTION AND RAOULT’S LAW
 An ideal solution is one in which the inter molecular force A-A, A-B and B-B are all equal; and obeys Raoult‟s
law exactly.
PROPERTIES OF IDEAL SOLUTION
 No heat change on mixing.
 No volume change in mixing; total volume of the solution is equal to the sum of the individual volumes.
Example of the mixtures that form ideal solution include:,
 Water and methanol
 Chlorobenzene and bromobenzene
 Heptane and octane
 Benzene and methylbenzene.
 Aminopentane and amino hexane
RAOULT`S LAW
States that:
“For an ideal solution, partial pressure of a given component, above the liquid mixture; is directly proportional
to its mole fraction in the liquid mixtureʺ
i.e.
Pi = Poi Xi
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 Pi ∝ xi
Where Pi =Partial pressure of component ,i
Xi =Mole fraction of the component, i
Pio = saturated water vapour of the component ,i

OR:
For a dilute ideal solution, partial pressure of a given component above the liquid mixture; is equal to its
saturated vapour pressure multiplied by its mole fraction.
Consider a liquid mixture of two components A and B which obeys Raoult‟s law
PA = POA . XA PB = POB.XB where nA = number of moles of
compound A
XA= nA XB= nB nB= number of moles of
(nA + nB) (nA + nB)

component B
Po A XA+Po BXB = Ptotal

But PA+PB=Ptotal
Limitations of Raoult’s law/conditions under which Raoult’s law hold
 Ideal solution should be sufficiently dilute
 Temperature must be constant
 Solute should be non-volatile
VAPOUR PRESSURE COMPOSITION DIAGRAM FOR A BINARY SOLUTION THAT OBEYS
RAOULTʼSLAW
Consider a binary solution containing components A and B
 From PA = PO A XA When XA= 1 , XB=0 for XA+XB=1, PA=POA
 Similarly PB=PBOXB
Where XB=1 and XA=0; PB=Po B.

POA F
liquid

PA
Saturated vapour pressure
Saturated vapour pressure

Vapour
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 C E

XA =1 , XB =0 composition/mole fraction XA=0 ,XB = 1

100% A 100%B

CURVES:
CD;- Shows the variation of vapour pressure of component B with its composition
EF; - Shows the variation of vapour pressure of component A with its composition
FD; -Variation in total vapour pressure of the solution with composition

 The more volatile component has a higher saturated vapour pressure at a given temperature if the
composition is the same.
 If the solution is ideal, the composition of the liquid boiling at a particular temperature is given
Ptotal=PA+PB
Ptotal=PO A XA +P o B XB
The vapour composition in terms of the mole fraction of components A and B is given by;
yA=PA/Ptotal = (PO A.XA ) /Ptotal
yB = PB/ pTotal = (PO B.XB ) /Ptotal

Examples
1(a). Calculate the composition benzene- toluene mixture which at 760mmHg boil at 88oc if the
saturated vapour pressure of benzene and Toluene at this temperature are 957 and 378mmHg respectively.
(b). Calculate the composition of the vapour obtained when the liquid mixture in A boils.
(c) Which of the two liquids is more volatile? Give a reason for your answer.
SOLUTION
a) Ptotal =760mmHg
POBenzene=957mmHg
POToluene =378mmHg
Ptotal=Ptoluene + PBenzene
= (Potoluene Xtoluene) +(POBenzene XBenzene) But XT + XB=1
→ XB=(1-XT)
Ptotal=POT XT + POB(1-XT)
Ptotal=P o T XT + P o B - P o B XT
760 =378.XT + 957 - (957XT)
760-957 = 378XT -957XT
-197 = -579XT
XT=0.34
XB = 1-0.34 = 0.66

b) YT =POT XT / Ptotal
=378X0.34 / 760
=0.169≈0.17

YB = POBXB / Ptotal
=957X0.66 / 760
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 =0.83
c) Benzene is more volatile
 Because it has the highest vapour composition

2. Calculate the composition of a liquid mixture of A and B which at 760mmHg boils at 980c if the
vapour composition of A and B are equal given that the saturated vapour pressure of A and B are
950mmHg and 320mmHg respectively.
SOLUTION
Vapour composition of A ; yA = PA/Ptotal
Vapour composition of B; yB = PB/Ptotal
yA = yB
PB/Ptotal=PB/Ptotal
PA=PB
POA XA=POBXB , XA + XB =1 , XB =1 – XA
→ POA XA=POB(1-XA) , 950XA = 320(1 – XA) , 950XA = 320 -320XA
1270XA =320
XA =0.25
XB= 1 - 0.25
XB=0.75
ASSIGNMENT
1. (a). The vapour pressure of ethanol at 20oc is 43.6mHg while that of benzene at the same temperature
is 75.2mmHg. the mole fraction of Benzene is 0.09 for a mixture of benzene and ethanol at 20oc.
Calculate the total vapour pressure of the mixture .
(b) Calculate the mole fraction of benzene at the vapour phase
BOILING POINT CURVES
Boiling point curve;
 a graph of temperature at which the mixture boils when plotted against
composition.
Increasing temperature increases the vapour pressure of both liquids in the mixture, but the
vapour pressure of a more volatile component increases more rapidly, such that the vapour above
the liquid mixture boiling is richer in the more volatile component,
so the composition of the vapour lies on the other side of straight line joining boiling point
BOILING POINT COMPOSITION DIAGRAM OF AN IDEAL SOLUTION

Bpt B

Temp (oc) vapour temperature (0C)

Liquid vapour

Bpt A

Liquid

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 XA=1 composition XB =1

XB =0 XA = 0
A binary solution giving a boiling point composition diagram in the above case can be separated into its
components by successive distillations

e Bpt B
d d
Temperature( ℃)

Vapour

Temperature(℃ )
g
BptA f
Liquid
h

XA=1 composition XB=1

XB=0 XA=0

 Heating a liquid of composition C richer in B, It boils at a temperature d; giving off a vapour of

composition e, at the same temperature
 Condensing the vapour, the liquid of the same composition, f is formed
 The liquid when boiled gives a vapour of composition g, at boiling point P which when condensed
gives a liquid, h of the same composition as the vapour at g.
 A series of successive boiling and condensation finally produces the pure vapour of the more volatile
component A while the residue in the flask becomes richer in the less volatile component
 Pure vapour when condensed gives pure liquid A
This is the principle of frictional distillation; a process of separation of two miscible liquids with
different boiling points
Question. Compound A,Boiling point 3800c and compound B boiling point 410oc forms an ideal solution
(a). Sketch a labeled boiling point composition diagram for the mixture.
(b). Using the diagram, describe and explain how pure B can be obtained from a mixture
containing 50%A and 50%B
Solution
a) Boiling point composition diagram for compound A and B
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 b) - A liquid mixture containing 50% B is heated ; boiling at temperature t; to give vapour of
composition r, richer in more volatile component A than the less volatile component B
-Condensing the vapour, liquid mixture of composition s, and so on until pure A is obtained as
distillate and the residue will be pure B.
Assignment
1.The normal boiling point of liquids A and B are 80oc and 110oc respectively. The mixture of A and B
can be assumed to obey Raoult‟s law. Show how the two substances can be separated by fractional
distillation and explain the principle involved in the process.
NON IDEAL/REAL/IMPERFECT SOLUTION.
 A real solution is the one which shows deviation from ideal behavior i.e. Raoult‟s law,
 Thus, a real solution is one which deviates from Raoult’s law.
 These deviations arise from the differences in the intermolecular forces of attraction between the
molecules of pure components and the molecules of different components.
 Vapour pressure of such solution is either higher or less than those predicted from Raoult‟s law and
therefore, the deviation are either positive or negative.
a) NEGATIVE DEVIATION
 Occurs when the vapour pressure of the system is lower than that expected by Raoult‟s law.
 This is because of the greater bond of attraction between molecules of different kind, A……B than
those of molecules of the same kind, A….A or B...B.
 this attraction leads to a reduction in the rate of escape of the molecules to the vapour phase,
decreasing volume and evolving heat.
Examples of solution which show negative deviations from Raoult‟s law
Liquid mixture / solution Reasons for deviation

a) HCl/HNO3 and water - Acid ionizes in water producing ions , and as ions are hydrated, strong ion –
dipole attraction are formed compared to Van der-Waals forces in acid and
hydrogen bonds in water.
- This reduces the escaping tendency of molecules into vapour state
B) Trichoromethanel/ - Intermolecular hydrogen bonding between the chloroform and acetone
formed, evolves a lot of heat and reduces the volume of the mixture which
Chloroform and propanone reduces the escaping tendency of the molecules into vapour state.

C) Phenol-Phenyl amine mixture - Intermolecular hydrogen bond formed by the phenol and phenyl amine due to the
differences in their polarities outweighs cohesive force in phenol and phenyl amine .
- heat is evolved and the volume decreases on mixing, reducing the escaping tendency of
the molecules into vapour state.

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
PROPERTIES OF MIXTURE WHICH DEVIATE NEGATIVELY FROM RAOULTʼS LAW.

 Total volume decrease when the liquids are mixed

 Heat energy is evolved

 Adhesive forces between components are stronger than the cohesive forces in the

individual component

Vapour pressure composition diagram of a liquid mixture showing negative deviation from

Raoult’s law

PoA liquid

ideal
Vapour pressure

Vapour presuure
PoB

vapour

XA = 1 Composition X B= 1

XB=0 XA=0

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
  Minimum, M in the diagram above implies that the solution will have to be heated

more in order for its vapour pressure to reach atmospheric pressure hence a

maximum boiling point .

Boiling point composition diagram for a liquid mixture showing negative deviation

Vapour

Temperature (0c)

Bpt A temperature (0c)

Bpt B

liquid

XA=1 composition XA=0

XB=0 XB=1

At M, vapour and liquids are indistinguishable i.e.the liquid mixture giving off vapour of the same
composition behaving as a pure liquid mixture is called maximum boiling azeotrope or constant
boiling mixture.
Definition.
An azeotrope
Is the liquid mixture that boils at a constant temperature ; yielding vapour of the same
composition as that of liquid at a constant pressure.

vapour
M
c r

b q Bpt B
Temperature(℃)

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
rature(℃)
 e d S

Bpt A f liquid

a p

XA=1 composition XB=1

XB=0 XA =0

 Successive boiling and condensation of a liquid mixture of composition a , a long

a,b,c, d e, and f gives off pure A in the vapour phase while the residue in the flask
tends towards a mixture of composition M(mixture of A and B).
 At M, any further boiling and condensation produces no change in composition
 Similarly for original mixture of composition P, boiling and condensation proceeds a
long p,q,r,s.
 Component B will be distilled off in the vapour phase while the residue in the flask
tends towards M.
 Frictional distillation therefore cannot completely separate the two components.
Reasons
 Separation by friction distillation is possible for mixture with components that differ
in their boiling point.
 However azeotropic mixture boils at a fixed constant temperature; with no change in
composition; hence volatile vapour of any component can be obtained from
azeotropic mixture thus cannot be separated by friction distillation
Assignment
1) At a constant temperature, a mixture of 11.95g of Trichoromethane and 14.5g propanone
deviates from Raoult‟s law and has a total vapour pressure of 300mmHg. If the saturated vapour
pressure of propanone and Trichloromethane are 380mmHg and 300mmHg respectively
(a).State the type of deviation from Raoult‟s law and briefly explain them.
(b).How does the mixture of Trichloromethane and propanone deviate from Raoult‟s law? Show
your working (C=12, O=16, H=1, Cl=35.5)
(c).(i) State what is observed when propanone is mixed with trichloromethane .
ii) Explain your answer in c (i)
2. a) Nitric acid (boiling point 860c) and water (boiling point 1000c) are completely miscible and yet
their
mixture cannot be completely separated by a single frictional distillation .
(i). Explain why a mixture of nitric acid and water which is miscible even with a marked
difference in boiling point of 14℃ cannot be completely separated by fractional distillation.
(b). The table below shows the composition of nitric acid in the liquid mixture and vapour above
in various temperatures.

Temp(oc) 86 100 120 111 103 100

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 %age of HNO3 in liquid 100 81 68 50 20 0

%age of HNO3 in water 100 87 68 30 06 0

(i) Plot a graph of temperature against vapour and liquid composition. Label the axes.
(ii)Write the coordinates of the azeotropic point and mark it on the graph as S
(iii)How many distillations are needed to obtain a distillate from a mixture of 50% nitric acid by
mass? Identify the distillate
(iv).Calculate the volume of the residue of frictional distillation of any mixture that would
completely react with marble chips to produce 448cm3of carbon dioxide at s.t.p (density of solution
=1.866gcm-3)
(b). POSITIVE DEVIATION
 Total vapour pressure of the system is higher than that expected from Raoult‟s law.
 This is because of the less attraction (greater repulsion ) between the molecules of different
components than that of the pure component.
 Bonding of A-A and B-B are broken on mixing two components.
 This causes the molecules of A and B have great tendency to escape from a liquid phase
giving higher vapour pressure
Properties of mixture s which deviate positively from Raoult’s law
 Increase in volume of the resultant solution
 Heat energy is absorbed
 Adhesive force between different components are weaker than cohesive force of the pure
component.
Examples of mixtures which deviate positively from Raoult’s law
Liquid mixture /solution Reason for deviation

Benzene-ethanol mixture - Benzene has no polar molecules with only van der waal forces of attraction present.
- Ethanol has polar molecules which can associate through hydrogen bonding .
- Those two forces are different in nature and when the components are put together, there will be
great repulsion between the molecules of benzene and ethanol.
- This increase escaping tendencies of the molecules in the mixture to vapour state.
Water-ethanol mixture - Water and ethanol associate through a strong intermolecular hydrogen bonding.
- Mixing the two, hydrogen bonds are broken down; causing less attraction between the molecules
of ethanol and water mixture than the average attraction between the molecules of the pure
component of ethanol –ethanol and water-water molecules hence increasing the escaping tendency
in vapour phase.
Other examples include;
 Cyclohexane and methanol mixture
 Carbon disulphide and ethanol mixture
 carbontetrachoride and methanol mixture
 Acetone and Carbon disulphide
 Benzene and cyclohexane
 Chloroform and ethyl alcohol.
Vapour pressure composition diagram of a liquid mixture showing positive deviation from Raoult’s
law

N Liquid

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
our pressure

ressure
 P0 A ideal

vapour

PoB

XA=1 composition XB =1

XB=0 diagram implies that the solution will require very

Maximum N, in the vapour pressure XA=0 little heat
for its vapour pressure to reach atmospheric pressure and hence minimum boiling point.
Boiling point composition diagram for a liquid mixture showing a positive deviation

Vapour Bpt B
Bpt A

Temperaturte(℃)
Temperature(℃)

liquid

XA=1 composition XB=1

XB=0 XA=0

At minimum N, the composition of vapour and liquid is indistinguishable.

Vapour

Bpt B
Temperature(℃ )

Temperature (℃ )

Bpt A c b
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 q r
e

s N d
f

liquid

P a
XA=1 composition XB=1

XB=0 XA=0

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 When a liquid of composition is a, is heated, successive boiling and condensation along a, b, c, d, e, f
gives off a vapour richer in azeotropic mixture while the residual liquid mixture in the flask becomes
richer in B.
Also if a liquid mixture of composition p is heated, successive boiling and condensation proceeds along
p,q,r,s giving off vapour richer in the azeotropic mixture whereas the residue liquid in the flask becomes
richer in A
It‟s also not possible to completely separate components by fractional distillation
Assignment
Two liquids are usually classified according to whether they obey Raoult‟s law.
(a). State Raoult‟s law and draw a diagram to show how the vapour pressure of an ideal binary mixture
vary with composition.
(b). (i) Give an example of a binary mixture which shows positive deviation from Raoult‟s law and draw
a labeled diagram of temperature against composition.
(ii) Explain in terms of molecular interaction the reasons for the deviation

(c) Explain why the mixture in (i) above cannot be separated by fractional distillation.
Properties of an azeotropic mixture
 Constant boiling point of the liquid mixture.
 Liquid and vapour have fixed compositions.
Separation of azeotropic mixtures
i. Chemical methods
- Involves addition of quick lime (CaO) which removes the water e.g. azeotropic mixture of water and ethanol.
CaO(s) +H2O(l) Ca (OH)2 (s)
ii. Distillation by use of third component
- E.g. an azeotropic mixture of ethanol and water can be separated by the addition of benzene and then distilling
mixture of the 3 components.
- First distillation yields an azeotropic mixture of the three components.
- The second distillation produces the mixture of ethanol and benzene and on distilling the mixture, pure ethanol is
obtained.
iii. solvent extraction
- One component can be extracted using a solvent in which it dissolves.
iv. adsorption
- Always effective by addition of silca gel which absorbs one of the components.
IMMISCIBLE LIQUID
 Are liquids which do not mix at all conditions. E.g Benzene and water, Trichloromethane and water,
Tetrachloromethane and water, Chlorobenzene and water etc.
In a mixture of two immiscible liquids;
 Each liquid exerts its own vapour pressure corresponding to its pure state at a particular
temperature independent of the other.
 vapour pressure above the liquid mixture will be the sum of vapour pressure of the two pure
components at that temperature.
 A mixture of two immiscible liquids will boil at a temperature lower than the normal boiling
point of the two liquids. This is because the total vapour pressure of the liquid reaches the
given external pressure at a lower temperature than either liquid alone.
 This is the principle of steam distillation.
Example:
(a). mixture of Chlorobenzene(bpt 131) and water (bpt 100) boils at 91℃
(b). mixture of amino benzene (bpt 180) and water (bpt 100) boils at 96.5℃
STEAM DISTILLATION
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
  is a technique of separating immiscible with water at a temperature below its boiling point by
bubbling steam through the mixture.
Experimental set up.

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 Procedure
 Flask containing immiscible mixture is gently heated and steam is passed through the container having

an impure mixture to be purified.

 Distillate is collected in the receiver and it contains two purified immiscible liquid e.g. water and

organic compound.

 Organic compound is then isolated using a separating funnel, dried using a drying agent.

NB: steam is preferred to liquid water because:-

 It keeps the mixture agitating
 Equilibrium between the vapors and the two liquids is rapidly attained.
CONDITIONS FOR STEAM DISTILLATION
 Components should have high RMM
 One of the components should be immiscible with water.
 Impurities in the mixture should be nonvolatile, so that they do not appear in the distillate.
 Components being separated should have a considerable saturated vapour pressure at temperature
near the boiling point of water.
Advantages of steam distillation.
 Used for purification of organic compounds which decompose near their boiling points.
 Thermal decomposition of compounds which occurs at high temperature doesn‟t take place.

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 Graphical determination of composition of distillate.

B D F
Patm
Pressure(atmosphere)

Pw
A

P0 C E

Tm Tw TO

Curves: Temperature(℃)
AB-variation of total vapour pressure of water and organic compound with temperature
CD-variation of vapour pressure of water with temperature
EF- variation of vapour pressure of pure organic compound with temperature.
From Dalton‟s law; Partial vapour pressure of a gas is directly proportional to its mole fraction
Partial pressure= mole fraction × P total ; Pw= Xw × P total
𝑛
But Xw = 𝑤
𝑛 𝑤 +𝑛 0

𝑛𝑤
Pw =𝑛 P total-----------------------------------(i)
𝑤 +𝑛 0

𝑛𝑜
Similarly P0 = P total ------------------ (ii)
𝑛 𝑤 +𝑛 0
Dividing (i) by (ii)

Pw 𝑛𝑤
𝑃𝑜
= 𝑛𝑜
𝑚𝑤
But nw = where mw = mass of water
𝑀𝑤
Mw =Relative molecular mass of water
𝑚𝑜
no = 𝑀𝑜
where Mo= RMM of organic compound
mo =mass of organic compound
𝑝𝑤 𝑚 𝑤 𝑀𝑤 𝑝𝑤 𝑚𝑤 .𝑀𝑜
= , =
𝑝𝑜 𝑚 𝑜 𝑀𝑜 𝑝𝑜 𝑚𝑜 .𝑀𝑤

𝑚𝑤 𝑃𝑤 .𝑀𝑤
=
𝑚𝑜 𝑃𝑜 .𝑀𝑜

Mass of water = partial pressure of water X RMM of water

Examples
Mass of organic compound partial pressure of organic compound X RMM of organic compound
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 1.When an organic compound P is steam distilled at normal atmospheric pressure of 760mmHg. The distillate
was found to contain 80% by composition of P. At this temperature, Vapour pressure of water is 640mmHg.
Calculate the RMM of P.
Solution
From; mass of water = partial pressure of water x RMM of water
Mass of organic compound partial pressure of organic compound X RMM of organic
compound
Total pressure =760mmHg
% mass of P = 80%
Partial pressure of water = 640mmHg
Partial pressure of organic compound = total pressure – partial pressure of water
= (760 – 640) mmHg
= 120mmHg
RMM of water = 18
Let the mass of water be Xg
Let the mass of p be Yg
Y X 100 = 80
X+ Y
100Y = 80 ; 100y = 80 (X+Y)
X+Y 1 20Y = 80X
𝑋 1
=
𝑌 4
1 = partial pressure of water X RMM of water
4 partial pressure of P RMM of P
1 = 640 X18
4 120X RMM of P
RMM of P = 640 X 18X 4
120
= 384
2. When Bromo benzene is steam distilled at normal atmospheric pressure of 760. The temperature of
distillation was found to be 95.7oc. At this temperature , the vapour pressure of water is 640mmHg.
Calculate the percentage composition of Bromo benzene in the distillate.
Solution
Partial pressure of bromo benzene = Total pressure – partial pressure of water
= (760 -640) mmHg
=120mmHg
RMM of water = 18g
RMM of C6H5Br = 72 +5+ 80 =- 157
Let the mass of water be Xg ; mass of Bromo benzene be Yg

From; mass of water = partial pressure of water x RMM of water

Mass of Bromobenzene partial pressure of bromobenzene X RMM of bromobenzene

X = 640X18
Y 120X157
X = 11520
Y 1884 0
Mass of water = 1152, mass of C6H5Br = 1884
Total mass of distillate = X+ Y
% age mass of C6H5Br = mass of C6H5Br X 100
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 Total mass

1884X100 = 62.06%
30.36
ACTIVITY
1. A mixture of naphthalene (C10H18) and water distilled at 98.3 0c and 753mmHg. Calculate the composition of
distillate as percentage by mass given that the vapour pressure of water at 980c is 715mmHg.
2. At 744mmHg, the steam distillation of a certain liquid takes place at 90 0c. The vapour pressure of water at this
temperature is 634mmhg, and the distillate contains 50% by mass of liquid T. calculate the RMM of T.
3. (a) what is steam distillation
(b) Explain the principle behind isolation of substance by steam distillation.
(c) Describe briefly how you would perform steam distillation in a laboratory.
DISTRIBUTION OF SOLUTE BETWEEN TWO NON MISCIBLE SOLVENTS
Distribution law\ distribution coefficient (KD)
Statement
“A non-volatile solute dissolved in two immiscible liquids in contact; distributes itself in such a way that at
equilibrium; the ratio of concentration of the solute in a mixture of two liquids is constant at a fixed constant
temperature”
i.e. consider a non volatile solute X in a mixture of two immiscible A and B.
[X] A = constant = KD of X between A and B.
[x] B
OR [X] B = constant = KD of X between B and A.
[X] A
Limitation of the law
Partition coefficient will remain constant if:
 Temperature must be constant i.e. Change in temperature alters the solubility of the solute between the
two solvents.
 Solvent must be immiscible
 Solution in contact must be dilute.
 Solute in each solvent should be of the same molecular state i.e. No dissociation and association
EXPT: TO DETERMINE PARTITION COEFFICIENT, KD
a) For iodine between water and Tetrachloromethane at a given temperature.
Procedure
 A known volume of an aqueous solution of Iodine is shaken with Tetrachloromethane in a separating
funnel; at a given temperature.
 The mixture is then left to settle for about ten minutes as to attain equilibrium.
 Known volumes of aqueous layer and organic layer are separately pipetted in different conical flasks;
titrated with standard sodium thiosulphate solution; using starch indicator.
I2 (aq) + 2 S2 𝑂32−(aq) S4 𝑂62−+2I – (aq.
Knowing the volume of sodium thiosulphate needed in a reaction, concentration of iodine in both layers
can be calculated from [I2] H20 =KD
[I2] CCl4
Example.
1) 20cm3 0.1M iodine solution in KI was shaken vigorously in a separating funnel with 20cm3 of CCl4. The color of
CCl4 gradually turned purple and finally dark purple. Explain the;
(a). (i). the role of KI in the experiment.
(ii). Observed colour change in the CCl4 layer.
(b) 10cm3 of CCl4 layer reacted completely with 18cm3 of 0.02M thiosulphate solution.
(i) Write an equation for the reaction.
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 (ii) Determine the KD of iodine between two solvents.
solution
(a). (i). KI provide I- which reacts with iodine to form a soluble complex.
I-(aq) +I2(s) I-3(aq)
(ii). Iodine distributes its self initially between CCl4 and KI solution causing a colour change of CCl4 to be
purple
Because of more solubility of iodine in CCl4 than in aqueous KI, more I - move to CCl4 layer making it
dark purple.
I2(aq) +2 S2032-(aq) +2 I (aq)
(b). 100cm3 of solution contain 0.02 moles of S2𝑂32−
18cm3 of the solution contain 0.02 ×18 moles of S2𝑂32−
100

= 3.6×104 moles
Equation; I2 (aq) + 2 S2 𝑂32−(aq) S4 𝑂62−+2I – (aq.

Moles of iodine 3.6×104 moles = 0.00018 moles

2
10cm3 of CCl4 layers contain 0.00018 of I2
1000cm3 of CCL4 layers contains 1000×0.00018 =0.018M
10

[I2] in CCL4 layers; 0.018M

Original concentration of I2 = 0.1M
[I2] H2O = 0.1 -0.018
= O.O82M
KD= [I2] H20 = 0.082 = 4.556
[I2] CCl4 0.018
KD= 4.56
b) Ethanol acid between water and Butanol
Procedure
 A known volume of water is mixed with known volume of Butanol in a separating funnel.
 A known mass of ethanoic acid is then added to the mixture, separating funnel is stoppered.
 The mixture is shaken for about 5min. left to settle so as to attain the equilibrium
 After the mixture has clearly separated into 2 layers, known volumes of each layer are pipette and titrated
with standard solution of NaOH using methyl orange indicator.
CH3COOH (aq) + NaOH (aq) H20 (l) + CH3COONa (aq)
 knowing the concentration of NaOH,, concentration of ethanoic acid in both layers can be determined ,
hence
KD = [CH3COOH] Butanol
[CH3C00H] water
C) Butan -1, 4- dioc acid (succinic acid ) between water and ethoxyethane
Procedure
 A known volume of water is mixed with a known volume of ethoxyethane in a glass flask.
 A known mass of succinic acid is then added to the flask, and shaken vigorously.
 The mixture is then left to settle so as to attain equilibrium.
 known volumes of organic and aqueous layers are pipetted into conical flask, titrated with standard
solution of NaOH using methyl orange as indicator.
 knowing the volume of NaOH required for complex reaction, the concentration of succinic aciod in both
layers can be determined ; hence
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 KD = [Butan -1, 4- diol acid] water
[Butan -1, 4-dioc acid] ethoxyethane
D) Ammonia between water and Trichloromethane.
Procedure.
 A known volume of aqueous solution of ammonia is shaken with trichloromethane for about 5
minutes; in a separating funnel at a fixed temperature.
 after equilibrium has been established, known volumes of aqueous layer and trichloromethane layer
are separately pipetted into different conical flasks; titrated with a standard solution of Hydrochloric
acid using methyl orange indicator.
NH4OH (aq)+ HCl (aq) NH4Cl (aq) + H20 (l)
 knowing the volume of HCl , the concentration of NH3 in the two layers can be determined ; and hence
KD = [ammonia] H20
[Ammonia] CHCl3
Examples
3
1. An aqueous solution of ammonis was shaken with 120cm of trichloromethane at 298K. When equilibrium was
3 3
attained, 25cm sample of each layer were titrated against 0.1M Hydrochloric acid . If 25cm of aqueous layer
3 3 3
required 27.5cm of 0.1M of HCl while 25cm of trichloromethane layer required 5cm of 0.1M Hydrochloric
acid.. Calculate coefficient of ammonia between trichloromethane and water.
Solution

Concentration of ammonia in CHl3 layer

3
1000cm of solution contain 0.1M of HCl
3
5cm of solution contain 5x0.1 moles of HCl. = 0.0005moles.
1000

Eqn; NH4OH (aq) + HCl (aq) NH4Cl (aq) + H 20(l)

1mole of NH4OH reacts with 1 mole of HCl
→ Moles of NH4OH in CHCL3 layer = 0.0005 moles
3
25cm of solution contains 0.0005moles of NH3
3
1000cm of solution contains 1000X0.0005 = 0.02M
25

Concentration of ammonia in aqueous layers

3
1000cm of solution contains o.1 moles of HCl
-3
27.5cm3 of solution contain 0.1X 27.5 moles of HCl = 2.75x10 moles
1000

→moles of NH4OH in aqueous solution layer = 0.000275moles (from the reaction equation)
3
25cm of aqueous layer contains 0.000275moles
1000cm3 of aqueous layer contains 0.000275X1000 = 0.11M
25
KD= [NH3] CHCl3
[NH3]H20
0.02 =0.182
0.11
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 KD= 0.18
2. 50cm3 of 1.5M ammonia solution was shaken with 50cm3 of Trichloromethane in a separating funnel. After
equilibrium had been reached 20cm3 of Trichloromethane layer was pipetted and titrated with 0.05M Hydrochloric
acid.If 23cm3 of the acid was required for neutralization. Calculated the KD of NH3 btn H20 and CHCl3 at this
temperature.
Solution
Eqn
Concentration of ammonia in CHCl3 layer
1000cm3 of solution contains 0.05moles of HCl
23cm3 of solution contains 23X0.05 moles of HCl. == 0.00115moles

1000
From equation, ; NH4OH (aq) + HCl (aq) NH4Cl (aq) + H20 (l)
1mole of NH4OH reacts with 1mole of HCl
→ Moles of NH4OH in CHCl3 layers =0.00115moles .
20cm3 of solution contains 0.00115moles
1000cm3 of CCl4 layers contain 0.00115X1000
20 [NH3] CHCl3 = 0.0575M

But original concentration of ammonia =1.5M

[NH3] in aqueous layer = 1.5- 0.1575
= 1.4425M
KD = [NH3] H2O
[NH3] CHCl3 = 1.4425 =25.087~ 25.1
0.0575

ACTIVITY
1. 50cm3 of 0.1M ammonia solution was shaken to equilibrium with 50cm3 of CHCl3 in a stoppered bottle at
25℃. 25cm3 of aqueous layer reacted completely with 24cm3 of 0.1M HCl solution. calculate the
concentration of NH3 in;
(a) CHCl3 layer
(b) Aqueous layer at equilibrium
(c) KD for NH3 between H2Oand CHCl3 at 250c
2 In an experiment to determine the KD of NH3 between water and CHCl3, 50cm3 of NH4OH was shaken with
3
250cm of CHCl3 until equilibrium was established; and the number of moles of NH3 in each layer was determined.
The experiment was repeated several times using aqueous ammonia of different concentration and the results are
given below
Amount of NH3 in 50cm3 of water (moles) 0.0065 0.0070 0.0095 0.014 0.019 0.025 0.028

Amount of NH3 in 250cm3 of CHCl3 0.0005 0.001 0.002 0.003 0.004 0.005 0.006

a) Plot a graph of concentration of NH3 in water against concentration of NH3 in trichloromethane.

b) Use your graph to determine KD of ammonia between water and trichloromethane.

APPLICATION OF KD
(a). SOLVENT EXTRACTION
 Is a technique of extracting a solvent from one solvent system to another solvent system; both solvents
being immiscible, solute maintaining its molecular state and temperature remaining constant.
OR

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
  Is the isolation of organic compounds from aqueous solution in which the organic compound is
immiscible by extracting it using another solvent in which the extracted compound is more soluble.
NOTE: Its more efficient to use smaller portions of the organic solvent.
Conditions of solvent extraction
 Solvents must be immiscible
 Temperature must be constant
 Solute must be more soluble in the extracting organic solvent
 Solute must not react in solvent
Example.
1. a) 60cm3 of an aqueous solution containing 0.3g of compound Y was shaken with 30cm3 of ethoxyethane and
the mixture allowed to stand. Calculate the mass of Y which was extracted into the ethoxyethane layer.(KD of Y
between ethoxyethane and water is 4.7)
b) The aqueous solution in (a) was extracted with two successive 15cm3 of ether, calculate the mass of Y that
was extracted by ether and comment on your answer.
Solution
(a). Volume of aqueous solution =60cm3 , Mass of compound Y= 0.3g, Volume of ethoxyethane = 30cm3, ( KD
between ethoxyethane and water is 4.7)
Let the mass of Y extracted by ethoxyethane be Xg
Mass of Y remaining in aqueous layer = (0.3 – x)g
KD =[ Y]ethoxyethane.
[Y] aqueous layer

KD = x/30 (0.3-x)
60 =4.7

X =0.210447 ~ 0.21045g
Mass of Y extracted into CH3CH2OC2CH3 layer is 0.2145g.

b) Let the mass of Y extracted by first 15cm3 of CH3CH2OC2CH3 be Mg

Mass of Y remaining in aqueous layer = (0.3 – M) g
KD=[Y] CH3CH2OC2CH3
(Y) Aqueous layer
= (M/15) (0.3-M)
60 hence M= 0.1621g
Mass of Y remaining in aqueous layer =0.3-0.1621
= 0.1379g

Let the mass of Y extracted by 2nd 15cm3 of CH3CH2OC2CH3 be Pg.

Mass of Y remaining in aqueous layer = (0.1379-P)
→4.7= (P/15) (0.1379-P) = P= 0.0745g

60
Comment; single extraction is less effective than successive extraction
ACTIVITY
1. An aqueous solution contains 0.2g of asprinne (C9H804) in 50cm3 of solution. To this solution was added
20cm of Diethyl ether. The mixture was shaken and allowed to reach equilibrium at 250c. At this temperature ,
3

the KD of C9H8 04 between diethylether and water is 4.7

(a). Calculate the mass of C9H804 that remain s in the aqueous layer

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 (b). If the extraction is carried out using two successive 10cm3 portion of ethoxyethane, determine the
mass of C9H804 that remain unextracted.
2 a) (i) Explain what is meant by the term solvent extraction
ii) State two conditions for solvent extractions
b) (i) calculate the mass of aniline [C6H5NH2] that can be extracted from 100cm 3 of water containing 3g
of C6H5NH2by using 20cm3 of Benzene[KD of C6H5NH2 between Benzene and water is 10]
ii) Determine the mass of C6H5NH2 that can remain in the aqueous layer if two extractions are carried
out using two successive portions of 10cm3 of Benzene.
(b) ANAYSIS OF COMPLEX ION
2+
Determination of formula of the complex formed btn excess ammonia and copper (ii) ion i.e.[Cu(NH3)n]
Procedure
 A known volume of excess ammonia solution is added to a glass flask containing an equal
2+ -3
volume of solution of Cu with known concentration of, X moldm .
2+
 Resultant deep blue solution (complex, [CU (NH3)n ]) formed is shaken with trichloromethane
and the mixture is allowed to settle so as to reach equilibrium.
 A known volume of the organic layer is pipetted into a conical flask, titrated with a standard
solution of Hydrochloric acid using methyl orange.
 The volume of Hydrochloric acid required for complex neutralization is noted, concentration of
-3
ammonia in the trichloromethane layer is then calculated, Ymoldm
 Procedure is repeated with aqueous layer and the total concentration of ammonia in the aqueous
-3
layer determined , Zmoldm
Results
 Portion coefficient of ammonia between water and chloroform = KD
-3
 Concentration of Cu2+ = Xmoldm
-3
 Concentration of NH3 in the organic layer =Y moldm
-3
 Original concentration of ammonia in the aqueous layer= Z moldm
Treatment of result
KD =[NH3]free
[NH3] organic layer (CHCl3)
KD=[NH3]free
Y
-3
[NH3] free = (KD.Y) = Wmoldm
But total [NH3] aqueous layer = Z
[NH3] complexed =total [NH3] aqueous layer –[NH3] free
-3
[NH3] complexed = (Z –W) mold
Number of ligands, n = [NH3)complexed
2+
[Cu ]

Examples; n = (Z-W)
1.When 0.05M of an aqueous solution of½CuSO X 4 was allowed to reach equilibrium with excess ammonia and
trichloromethane, the aqueous layer was found to contain 0.725M while the organic layer was found to
contain 0.021M of ammonia (KD of aqueous ammonia between aqueous layer and organic layer=25)
a) Calculate the concentration of free NH3 in the aqueous layer
b) Determine the value of n in copper
Solution
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 -3
a) KD =25 , [NH3] CHCl3 =0.021moldm
From KD = [NH3] free
[NH3] organic layer
25 =[NH3]free
0.021
[NH3]free = 0.525moldm-3
b) [NH3] complexed = total [NH3] aqueous layer – [NH3] free
=0.725-0.525
-3
[NH3] complexed = 0.2 moldm
n= [NH3] complexed = 0.2
2+
[Cu ] 0.05
n=4
Number of ligands =4
Equation of formation of complex
2+ 2+
Cu (aq) +4NH3(aq) [Cu (NH3)4 ] (aq)
3 3
2. 25cm of excess ammonia solution was added to 25cm to 0.1M CuSO4 solution. The resulting deep blue
3 3
solution was shaken with 50cm of CHCl3 and the mixture allowed to settle .50cm of the CHCl3 layer
3 3
required 25.5cm of 0.05M of HCl for neutralisation. 20cm of the aqueous layer was neutralized by
3
33.3cm of 0.5M HCl. ( KD between water and trichloromethane = 25) .Find the formula of the complex
formed
Solution
Concentration of ammonia in organic layer
3
1000cm of solution contain 0.05moles of HCl
3
25.5cm of solution contain 25.5X0.05 moles of HCl
1000
= 0.001275moles of HCl
NH 4 0H (aq) + HCl(aq) NH4CL (aq) +H20 (l)
From the equation above, 1mole of NH4OH reacted with 1 mole of HCl
Moles of aqueous ammonia =0.01275moles
3
50cm of organic layer containing 0001275moles of NH3(aq)
3
1000cm of organic layer contain 0.001275X1000
50
=0.0255M
[NH3] organic layer =0.0255M
Concentration of ammonia in aqueous layer
3
1000cm of organic layer contain 0.5moles of HCl
3
33.3cm of solution contain 33.3 X 0.5 moles of HCl
1000
Moles of HCl reacts with ammonia in the aqueous layer = 0.01665moles
Moles of NH3(aq) in the aqueous layer that reacted in HCl=0.01665(from mole ratio as per the eqn)
3
20cm of aqueous layer contain 0.01665 moles of NH3(aq)
3
1000cm of aqueous layer contain 1000X0.01665 moles of NH3
20
=0.8325M
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 Total [NH3] aqueous layer = 0.8325
KD = [NH3] free
[NH3] CHCl3
[NH3] free = KDX] NH3] CHCl3, =25X0.0255
-3
[NH3] free = 0.6375moldm
[NH3] complexed = total [NH3] aqueous layer –[NH3]free
=0.8325-0.6375
[NH3] complexed =0.195M
n= [NH3complexed]
2+
[Cu ]

n= 0.195
(1/2X0.1)
n =3.9~ n=4
GRAPHICAL DETERMINATION OF THE FORMULA OF COMPLEX FORMATION BETWEEN
2+
EXCESS NH3 AND Cu
A graph of concentration of ammonia in CuS04 against concentration of ammonia in organic layer
CHCL3

[NH3] in
aqueous
CuS04 layer
p

[NH3] organic layer

From the graph
Y- Intercept P (gives the minimum amount of ammonia required to form complex)
Number of complexed ammonia
2+
0.1mole of Cu forms complex with Pmoles of NH3
2+
1 mole of Cu form a complex with (P/0.1) moles of NH3
Note: if water is used, the line passes through the origin showing no complex is formation
[NH3] water

[NH3]CHCl3
Question
The table below shows the partition of ammonia between 0.1M CuSO4 and CHCl3
[ [NH3] (0.1M CuSO40.86
) 0.86 1.10 1.10
1 1.57 2.40 1.80 2.40

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
[ [ NH3](CHCl3) 0.02 0.02 0.03 0.05 0.03 0.06 0.05 0.080.06 0.08

a) Plot a graph of concentration of ammonia in 0.1 CuSO4 against [NH3] in CHCl3

b) Determine the intercept on Y- axis
c) What is the signification of the intercept? (show your working)
d) What happens when the above experiment is repeated using water instead of 0.1M Cu2+. Give a reason for your
answer

C) ION EXCANGE:
 is the type of partition of ionic compounds
 Ion exchange resin is a polymer which removes undesirable cations or anions and replaces them with
other cations or anions.
 Cation exchangers contain reactive hydrogen ions which may exchange with other cations like Na+, Ca2+,
or Mg2+ in a reversible reaction. E.g R(CH2) n C-00H, -SO3H and R(CH2)n OH.
 Anion exchangers contain basic OH which are exchanged for other anions like chloride or sulphate e.g.
secondary, tertiary and quaternary amino gps.
 Ion exchange can be used in purification of water in the following ways;
2+ 2+
(i). Water may be softened by ion exchange by removing the Ca orMg
2+ +
NaR(s) +Ca CaR2(s) + Na (aq) where R- resin
(ii). Water is then further purified by using both cations and anion exchange to form de-ionized water.
This is a two state process;
+
(a) A cation exchanger removes cations replaces them with H
+ + + +
-SO3H (aq) +Na (aq) -SO3Na (aq)+H (aq)
(b). Anion exchanger removes cations and replaces them with OH anion
- -
R0H +Y (aq) RY(s) + OH
(D) DETERMINATION OF SOLUBILITY AND EQUILIBRIUM CONSTANTS
 Knowing the solubility of iodine in CS2 and the partition coefficient, solubility of iodine in water can be
determined from;

KD = solubility of iodine in pure H20

Solubility of iodine in CS2

Example. Some iodine was dissolved in 0.3M KI solution and solution was shaken with CS2 until equilibrium
was established. The concentration of iodine in both layers was then determined by titration. The solubility of
iodine in pure H2O and CS2 are given in the table below
Concentration (M) Aqueous layers Organic layer

0.044 0.13

Concentration (M) Pure H2O CS2

4X10-4 0.234

i) Determine the KD of iodine between water and CS2

ii) Calculate the equilibrium for the reaction
Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI
MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .
 Solution
i) KD= solubility of I2 in pure water
Solubility of I2 in CS2
=4X10-4
0.234
KD = 1.71X10-3
(ii) equation I2(aq) +I-(aq) I3-(aq)
KD= [I2] free
[I2]CS2
[I2]free = KD X[I2]CS2
= 1.71X10 -3 X0.13
-3
[I2}free = 2.2X10-4 moldm
[I2] complexed = total[I2] aqueous layer – [I2] free
= 0.044 -2.2X10-4
-3
[I2] complexed = 0.04378moldm
K equilibrium= [Product]
[Reactants]
-
= [I3 ]
-
[I2] [I ]
[I-] =0.3 – 0.04378(iodine complexed)
-3
= 0.257622moldm
K equilibrium = 0.04378
2.2x10 -4 X 0.25622
-3
=776.68mol -1 dm

Compiled by Lawrence arum +256-7505133312/717503108, HOD at K.SS, Also taught at KISUBI

MAPEERA, ST JOSEPH‟S GIRLS NSAMBYA, KAKIRA S.S, LAKE SIDE COLLEGE LUZIRA .